Cadillac 1998 Eldorado Owners Manual Owner's
2015-10-23
: Cadillac Cadillac-1998-Cadillac-Eldorado-Owners-Manual-812926 cadillac-1998-cadillac-eldorado-owners-manual-812926 cadillac pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 380
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
REPRODUCTION r P I . . .. . . : . . r"a t I 1-1 Seats and Restraint Systems This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the "SIR" system. 2- 1 Features and Controls This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle. 3- 1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system. 4-1 Your Driving and the Road Here you'll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions. 5- 1 Problems on the Road This section tells what to do if you have a problem while driving. such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc. 6-1 Service and Appearance Care Here the nlanual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good. 7-1 Customer Assistance Information This section tells you how to contact Cadillac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications. It also gives you information on "Reporting Safety Defects" on page 7- 12. 8- 1 Index Here's an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read. i We support voluntary technician certification. CERTIFIED GENERAL MOTORS. GM and the GM Emblem. CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Emblem and the name ELDORADO are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever it appears in this manual. Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be there if you ever need it when you‘re o n the road. If you sell the vehicle. please leave this manual in i t so the new owner can use it. WE SUPPORT VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN CERTIFICATION THROUGH Nmona! 1ns:l:uta fr,r AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE EXCELLENCE Aux proprietaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guideen franpis chez votre concessionaire ou au: DGN Marketing Services Ltd. 1500 Bonhill Rd. Mississauga. Ontario L5T 1C7 Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 25665433 A First Edition ii ‘~“Copyripht General Motors Corporation 1997 All Rights Reserved The PENALTY OF LEADERSHIP adillac Motor CarCo. Detroit, Mich I H I S TEXT APPEARED AS AN ADVERTISEMENT IN THE YATURD.4Y EVENING POST? J h N l i . \ R Y 2ND. IN THE YE,\R 1‘915 COPYRIGHT, CADILI..4C XlGTOR CAR DIVISION Henry M. Leland, founder of Cadilluc, stands beside the 1905 “Osceola” which was built to evaluate the feasibility of a closed bodied car. Few automobiles are fortunate enough to have the rich heritage that is Cadillac. The name Cadillac is appropriately that of Antoine deLa Mothe Cadillac, the French military commander who founded the cityof Detroit in 1701. What better namefor the oldest automobile manufacturerin Detroit. Henry M. Leland, known as the master of precision, initiated his precision manufacturing techniques at the founding of Cadillac in 1902. His exacting standards prompted the motto by which Cadillac has beenguided over the wars - "Craftsmanship A Creed - Accuracy X Law.'' The introduction of the first four cylinder enginein 1905 led the industry and enabled Cadillacs to travel at speeds up to 50 mph. For attention to quality and innovation, the Royal Automobile Club of England awarded the prestigious Dewar Trophy to Cadillac twice . . . first in 1908 for achieving perfect interchangeabilityof parts and again for introducing the electricself starter, electric lighting and ignition system on 1912 models. Cadillacis the only American manufacturer to win this honor and the only manufacturer in the world to win it twice. As commonplace as standardized partsare today, in 1908 parts were still individually hand fitted both in production and service. 1914 V8 Engine 1949 Overhead Valve High Compression V8 Engine VI 4 Engines 1930-1940 Standardization opened the eyes of the industrial world and was the cornerstone of modem assembly line production. From this achievement evolved the reference to Cadillac as“Standard of the World.” In 1909 Cadillac was purchased by the then new General Motors Corporation. Convenience, cleanliness and all-weather comfort were greatly enhanced in 1910 when Cadillac became the first manufacturer to offer closed bodies as standard equipment. “The Penaltyof Leadership” first appeared inthe January 2, 1915 issue of The Saturday Evening Postas an expression of the Cadillac commitment to leadership, quality and innovation. Itis widely regarded as one of the finest documents ever written. It was published following the introduction of the first production V8 engine, which was standard in all Cadillacs beginning with the 1915 model. Many Cadillac “firsts” have followed over the years, inciuding the synchro-mech clashless transmission, a nationwide comprehensive service policy. security plate glass. chrome platingand the first car to be designed by a stylist ( 1927 LaSalle/Harley Earl).The ’30s witnessed production of the powerful, smooth and quiet V12 and V16 engines. The crisp, contemporary lines of the 1938 60 Special series ushered in a new era in styling. VI 6 Engin e During World War 11, shortly after PearlHarbor. Cadillac discontinued car productionfor the first time since 1902 in order to construct light tanks,combat vehicles and internal parts for Allison V17 10 engines. Two Cadillac V8 engines and Hydra-Matic transmissions were used in each M5AI and M24 tanks. 1931 V I 6 Sport Phaeton There are, to be sure, many ways to describe the superlative motor car pictured. "Beauty," "majesty,""brilliance" -allapply,in their fullest meaning, to this new Cadillac. And yet, from this wonderful vocabulary, we have selected "elegance" as the word that most fully characterizes the Cadillac of 1960. The car's beautiful, clean-lined styling is certainly elegant beyond compare. Its new interior luxury provides a feeling of elegance that can be sensed nowhere else in the world of motor cars. And even its new performance - smooth, quiet and effortless - might be summarized as "elegance in motion.''Once you have seen and driven it for yourself, we think you will agree that the word is "elegance" - and that the car is Cadillac! C.WILLAC MOTOR CAR DMSION. GENEFCL MOTOFS COFS'OMON advances such as air suspension. memory seat, automatic electricdoor locks, transistor radio. a brushed stainless steel roof and low profile tires. For the 1948 model. Cadillac introduced the legendary tail fin which once more set the trend in automotive styling for nearly two decades. This was closely followed with the two door hardtop Coupe DeVille and the industry’s first modem overhead valve, high compression V8 engine on the 1949 model. Engineering innovations. conveniences and styling dominated the ’50s and ‘60s. Cruise control, automatic climate control. tilt and telescoping steering wheels, twilight sentinel and four door hard tops all debuted in these years. In 1957 the Eldorado Brougham featured The Eldorado. introduced in 1953, wziS redesigned for 1967 as the first front wheel drive personal luxury car. The 472 cu. in. V8.engineused in all Cadiilacs in 1968 and 1969 was enlarged to SO0 cu. in. for all 1970 through 1976 Eldorados. The Track Master computerized skid control braking system option debuted on 1970 Eldorados. A driver and passenger Air Cushion Restraint system (air bag) was available on ali 1974. 1975 and 1976 Cadillacs. Analog Electronic Fuel Injection was available. on 1975 Cadillacs and standard on the new international size 1976 Seville. In 1978. the Trip Computet. option incorporated the first on-board microprocessor. The electronics and computerization which were pioneered by Cadillac in the ’70s came of age in the ’80s with Digital Fuel Injection and On-Board Diagnostics in 1980. four wheel Anti-lock Brakes on 1986 models and Traction Control in the fdl of 1989. The 1992 Seville STS was the first car ever towin all three major automotive awards: Car of the Year, Motor Trend; Ten Best List, Car & Driver; Car of the Year. Automobile Magazine. The year 1993 saw the introduction of the Northstar system. The stateof the art system includes the 32 valve, dual overhead camshaft, Northstar4.6 liter V8 engine, 4T80-E electronically controlled automatic transaxle, road sensing suspension, speed sensitive steering. anti-lock brakes and traction control. For more than nine decades Cadillac has been a leader in quality and technical innovation. Now more than ever, Cadillac is “Creating a Higher Standard.” Many people read their owner's manual from beginning to end when they first receivetheir new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for yourvehicle. In this manual. you'll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly. A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back of the manual. It's an alphabetical list of what's in the manual, and the page number where you'll find it. ngs and sv e. .I You will find a number of safety cautionsin this book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. These mean thereis something that could hurt you or other people. In the caution area. we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don't. you or others could be hurt. You w i l l also find a circle with ;1 slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means "Don't,'' "Don't do this" or "Don't let this happen." Also, in this bookyou will find thesenotices: NOTICE: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle. In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, andit could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warningsin different colors orin different words. You'll also seewarning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION orNOTICE. xii For example, these symbols are used on an original battery: CAUTION POSSIBLE INJURY A These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven: DOOR LOCK UNLOCK PROTECT EYES BY SHIELDING CAUSTIC BAlTERY ACID COULD CAUSE BURNS These symbols have to do with your lamps: These symbols are on some of your controls: These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights: WINDSHIELD WIPER TURN SIGNALS COOLANT TEMP e BAlTERY CHARGING SYSTEM WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER FASTEN SEAT BELTS COOLANT ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ,\I/, FOG LAMPS #0 I-1 FUSE t LIGHTER (0) tcr HORN BRAKE WINDOW DEFOGGER SPARK OR FLAME COULD EXPLODE BAllERY -- Here are some other symbols you may see: ANTI-LOCK BRAKES a cr e, SPEAKER FUEL (@) p3 Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Here you’ll find information about theseats in your Cadillac and how t o use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts. 1- 2 1- 6 1- 11 1- 12 1- 12 1- 19 1- 20 1 - 20 Seats and Seat Controls Safety Belts: They’re forEveryone Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts -- and the Answers How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Driver Position Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Right Front Passenger Position Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System 1- 26 I - 29 I - 30 1- 33 1- 45 1- 48 1- 48 1- 48 Rear Seat Passengers Center Passenger Position Children Child Restraints Larger Children Safety Belt Extender Checking Your Restraint Systems Repiacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 1-1 Seats and Seat Controls This section tells you about the power seats -- how to adjust them, and also about the reclining front seatbacks. memory seats, lumbar adjustments, head restraints, heated seats and seatback latches. The power seat controls are locatedon the outboard side of the front seat cushion. Move the front of the control in the direction of the arrows to adjust the front portion of the cushion up or down. Move the rear of the control in the direction of the arrows to adjust the rear portion of the cushion up or down. Power Seats 0 Lift up or push down on both outer arrows at the same time to move the entire seat up or down. To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slide the control in the direction of the center arrow. 1-2 Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped) I I The lumbar control is located on the outboard side of each front seat.It provides additional support to your lower back and it works independently of the other seat controls. Use the power seat control first to get the proper position. Then proceed with the lumbar adjustment. To reshape the lower seatback, press the lumbar control forward to increase supportand rearward to decrease support. Press the control up or down to raise or lower the support mechanism. Memory Seat and Mirrors (If Equipped) Automatic seat and mirror movement will occur if the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to enter the vehicle. The numberon the back of the transmitter corresponds tothe 1 or 2 seat and mirror position. Afterthe unlock button is pressed on the RKE transmitter (the ignitionmust be in LOCK) or when the key is placed in the ignition, the seatand mirrors will automatically adjustto the appropriate position. Automatic seat and mirror movement is programmed through the Driver Information Center(DIC) so that the driver can select whether or not movement will occur using the RKE transmitter or by placing the ignition key in the ignition. For programming information, see “Pragrammable, Memory and Personalization Features” in the Index. Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as it may during long trips,so should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed. If you have the optional personalization package,the power lumbar controlcan be programmed for memory recall. For more information. see “Programmable, Memory and Personalization Features” in the Index. 1-3 Heated Front Seat (Option) The control is located in the center console. Move the switch to LO or HI to turn on the heating elements in the seat. The LO setting warms the seatback and cushion until the seat approximates body temperature. The HI setting heats the seat toa slightly higher temperature. A telltale light in the control reminds you that the heating system is in use. The heated seats can only be used when the ignition is turned on. 1-4 Reclining Front Seatbacks Press the control forward or rearward to adjust the seatback. A CAUTION: L But don’t have a seatback reclinedif your vehicle is moving. , ~ Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this. its job. In a crash you The shoulder belt can’t do could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries. The lapbelt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, notat yourpelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. Head Restraints Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. The head restraints tilt forward and rearward also. 1 -5 The seatback may not fold without some help fromyou if your vehicle is parked going down a fairly steep hill. In this case, push the seatback toward the rear as you lift the latch. Then the seatback will fold forward. Thelatch must be down for the seat to work properly. Seatback Latches I A CAUTION: If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked. The front seatback folds forward to let people get into the rear seat. The seatback will move back and forth freely unless you come to a sudden stop, then it will lock into place. 1-6 Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR), or air bag system. A CAUTION: Don’t let anyoneride where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and you’re not wearinga safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not beif you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too. In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work. A CAUTION: It is extremelydangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow peopleto ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot! Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.) 1-7 Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. i kTake the simplest vehicle. Suppose it's just a seat on wheels. 1-8 I Put someone on it. .;::;-* Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn't stop. The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ... 1-9 or the instrument panel ... or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That's why safety belts make such good sense. 1-10 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About Safety Belts -- and the Answers Q; Won’t I be trapped in the vehicleafter an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt? A: You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Q; If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only;so they work with safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehiclethat has air bags. you still have to buckleup to get the most protection. That’s truenot only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. If I’m a good driver, andI never drivefar from home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident -- even one that isn‘t your fault -- you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occurwithin 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 k m / h ) . Safety belts are for everyone. 1-11 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Adults This part is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.”Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We’ll start with the driver position. Driver Position This part describes the driver’s restraint system. Lap-Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly. 1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat (to see how. see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight. 1-12 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt isn’t long enough. see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety beltlocks if there’s a sudden stop or crash. 1-13 Shoulder Belt Tightness Adjustment Your car has a shoulder belt tightness adjustment feature. If the shoulder belt seems too tight, adjustit before you begin to drive. 4. Let the belt go back all the way. You should hear a slight clicking sound. If you don't, the adjustment feature won't set, and you'll have to start again. c 1. Sit well back in the seat. 2. Start pulling the shoulder belt out. A A A A A 5 . Now you can add a small amount of slack. Lean forward slightly, then sit back. If you've added more than 1 inch (25 mm) of slack, pull the shoulder belt out as you did before and start again. 3. Just before it reaches the end, give it a quick pull. 1-14 If you move around in the vehicle enough, pull out the shoulder belt. or open your door, the belt will become tight again. If this happens, you can reset it. What’s wrong with this? A CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. Don’t allow more than1 inch (25 mm) of slack. f F f A: The shoulder beltis too loose.It won’t give nearly as much protection this way. 1-15 @ What’s wrong withthis? A CAUTION: You can be seriouslyinjured if your beltis buckled in the wrong place like this.In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forceswould bethere, not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you. A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 1-16 f What's wrong withthis? A CAUTION: F You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move toofar forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force the to ribs, which aren't as strong shoulder as bones. You could also severelyinjure internalorgans like yourliver or spleen. r p f i r b A: The shoulder beltis worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. 1-17 @ What’s wrong with this? A CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces.If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it. A: The belt is twisted across the body. 1-18 F I Safety BeltUse During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts. p“ r I I To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. P Before you close thedoor, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. A pregnant woman shouldwear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. F 1-19 The best way to protect the fetus is to protectthe mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section. The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing. If you ever pull the lap portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and start again. Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) System This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) system or air bag system. Your vehicle has two air bags -- one airbag for the driver and another air bag for the right frontpassenger. 1-20 Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system: A CAUTION: You can be severelyinjured or killed in acrash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you have air bags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduceyour chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejectedfrom it. Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags are designed to work with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bagsare designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. Theyaren’t designed toinflate at all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal crashes. Everyone inyour vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there’san air bag for thatperson. -- -- r r ! r A CAUTION: Air bagsinflate with great force, faster than the an inflating blink of an eye. If you’re too close to air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keepyou in position beforeand duringa air crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with bags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. r A CAUTION: r r Children who are up against, or very close to,an air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the best protectionfor adults and older children, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither CAUTION: (Continued) \ ft i CAUTION: (Continued) the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see the part of this manual called “Children”and see the caution labelson the sunvisors and the right front passenger’s safety belt. There is anair bag readiness lighton the instrument panel, which shows AlR BAG. The system checksthe air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light”in the Index for more information. 1-21 HOW the Air Bag System Works I 1 w.. . . The right front passenger's airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger's side. Where arethe air bags? The driver's air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel. 1-22 1A CAUTION: If something is between an occupant and an air or it bag, the bag might not inflate properly might force the object into that person. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag, anddon’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering. ~~ When shouldan airbag inflate? An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above thesystem’s designed “threshold level.”If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 kmk). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can besomewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform,such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers. side impacts orrear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicleor because of what the repair costs were. Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows downin frontal or near-frontal impacts. What makes anair bag inflate? In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detectsthat the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. Theinflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules insidethe steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right frontpassenger. 1-23 How does an air bag restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal cobsions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheelor the instrument panel.Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute theforce of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts andside impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal collisions. What will you see after an air bag inflates? After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag -- will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust comingfrom vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent thedriver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it stop peoplefrom leaving the vehicle. 1-24 A CAUTION: When an air bag inflates, thereis dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to doso. If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door. Your vehicle has a feapre that will automatically unlock the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air bags inflate (ifbattery power is available). You can lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using the door lock and interior lamp controls. In many crashes severeenough to inflate an air bag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag. 0 0 0 Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The modulerecords information about the readinessof the system. when the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. Let only qualified technicianswork on your air bag system. Improper service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service. NOTICE: If you damage the covering for the driver’s air bag, it may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module.Do not open or break the air bag covering. Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There are partsof the air bag system in several places around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is worlung on your vehicle. Your dealer and the Cadillac Service Manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications”in the Index. IA CAUTION: For up to 10 seconds after the ignitionkey is an air turned off and the battery is disconnected, bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injuredif you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are Be sure to probably partof the air bag system. follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so. The air bag system does not need regular maintenance. 1-25 Rear Seat Passengers Lap-Shoulder Belt It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly. Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions I . Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Don’t let it get twisted. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. 1-26 If the belt stops before it reaches thebuckle. tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it. 3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see“Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-27 /--\ /-l II A CAUTION: You can be seriously hurtif your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body. t The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ln a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. I Center PassengerPosition Lap Belt When you sit in the center seating position,you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along thebelt. 1-29 Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone,to use safety restraints. In fact. the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says childrenup to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. Smaller Children and Babies I A CAUTION: To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug. Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt.If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender’’ at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-30 Children who are up against, or very close to,an air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protectionfor adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its air bag system is designedfor them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. I f r s r r I A CAUTION: Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraintwill say whether it is the righttype and size for your child. A very young child’ship bones are so small that a regular belt might not staylow on the hips, as it should. Instead, the belt will likely be overthe child’s abdomen.In a crash, the belt would apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause seriousor fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child smallenough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint. Infants need complete support, including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s neck is weak andits head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby should be securedin an appropriate infant restraint. This is so important that many hospitals today won’t release a newborn infant to its parents unless isthere an infant restraint available for the baby’s firstintrip a motor vehicle. 1-31 I CAUTION: (Continued) at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold. Secure the babyin an infant restraint. A CAUTION: Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash CAUTION: (Continued) -- 1-32 I Child Restraints Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints. Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints are available in four basic types. When selecting a child restraint, take into consideration not only the child’s weight and size. but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface.With an infant car bed, make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle. 1-33 Y X A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant to face the rear of the vehcle. Rear-facing infant restraints are designed for infantsof up to about 20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one yearof age. This type of restraint faces the rearso that the infant's head. neck and body can have the support they need in a crash. Some &ant seats come in two parts -- the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable. 1-34 A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These forward-facing restraints are designed tohelp protect children who are from 20 to 40 Ibs. (9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years of age. One type, a convertible restraint. is designed to be used either as a rear-facing infant seat or a forward-facing child seat. 1-35 A booster seat (F,G ) is designed for children whoare abut 40 to 60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about four to fit of eight years of age. It's designed to improve the the vehicle's safetybelt system. Booster seatswith shields use lap-only belts; however, booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window. 1-36 When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is. it will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructionson the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use thebelt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s manual and the child restraint instructions are important, so if either one of these is not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer. Where toPut the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.We at General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat.Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here‘s why: A CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. Thisis because the backof a rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. You may, however, secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Before you secure a forward-facing child restraint, alwaysmove the front passenger seatas far back as itwill go. Or, secure the child restraint in the rear seat. Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it. 1-37 Top Strap If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you can ask your Cadillac dealerto put it in for you. If you want to install an anchor yourself. your dealer can tell you how to do it. Canadian law requires that child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored. If your child restraint has a top strap,your dealer can obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation instructions specifically designed for thisvehicle. The dealer can then install the anchor for you. In Canada, this work will be done for you free of charge. Or. you may install the anchor yourself using the instructions provided in the kit. 1-38 r if Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat Position n You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the childin the childrestraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Put the restraint on the seat. 2. Pick up the latchplate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint. r I 1-39 I 3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-40 4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. If you're using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 5. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint. just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. See the earlier part aboutthe top strap if the child restraint has one. I . Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt. 2. Put the restraint on the seat. 3 . Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how. 1-41 L 5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you pugh down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure, To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able tounbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-42 r P Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat Position You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward-facing-child restraint. (See “Seats”in the Index.) r P Your vehicle has a right front passenger bag. air Never put a rea‘r-facing child restraint in this seat.. Here’s why: I A CAUTION: 2. Put the restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how. If the shoulder beltgoes in frontof the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint. A child in arearfacing child restraintcan be seriously injuredif the right front passenger’s air bag inflates.This is because theback of a rearfacing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag.Always secure arearfacing child restraintin the rearseat. 1-43 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-44 5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. Larger Children F 6. To tighten the belt, feed the lapbelt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7 . Push and pull the child restraint in different directions tobe sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle's safety belts. If you have the choice, achild should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap-shoulderbelt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. 1-45 Accident statistics showthat children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat.But they need to use the safety belts properly. 0 Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash. 0 Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are. A CAUTION: Never dothis. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The In a belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be usedby only one persona t a time. &.’ What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the childis so small that the shoulder belt is or neck? very close to the child’s face A: 1-46 Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck,you might want to place the child in the center seat position. the one that has only a lap belt. _ I A CAUTION: A Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would thenbe applied right on the or child’s abdomen. That could cause serious fatal injuries. Wherever the child sits. the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips. just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. 1-47 Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it,take the heaviest coatyou will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be justfor you, and just forthe seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, justattach it to the regularsafety belt. Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then. make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.) 1-48 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts were stretched, asthey would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new belts. If belts are cut ordamaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision. If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace airbag system parts. Seethe part on the air bag system earlier in this section. kb NOTES 1-49 $&I 1-50 NOTES Section 2 Features and Controls Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained arethe instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem. 2-2 2-4 2-6 2-9 2- 13 2 - 14 2-16 2- 17 2- 17 2-19 2-20 2-2 1 2-25 2-26 2-28 2-29 Keys Door Locks Remote Keyless Entry (RKEj System Trunk Theft Theft-Deterrent System (If Equipped) PASS-Key(% New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Positions Starting Your Engine Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped) Automatic Transaxle Operation Parking Brake Shifting Into PARK (P) Shifting Outof PARK (P) Parking Over ThingsThat Burn 2-29 2-30 2-3 1 2-32 2-32 2-39 2-42 2-44 2-49 2-5 1 2-5 1 2-52 2-52 2-56 2-6 1 2-70 Engine Exhaust Running Your Engine While You‘re Parked Windows Tilt Wheel Turn SignalMultifunction Lever Exterior Lamps Interior Lamps Mirrors Storage Compartments Sun Visors Cellular Telephone (Option) Astroroof (Option) Universal Transmitter (Optionj Instrument Panel Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators Driver Information Center (DIC) 2-1 Keys A CAUTION: Leaving youngchildren in a vehicle with the ignition key isdangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They couldoperate power windowsor other controls or even make the vehicle move. If they turned the ignition to ON and moved the shift lever out of PARK (P),that would release the parking brake. Don’t leave the keys ina vehicle with young children. 2-2 ‘I‘ I The square key is for the ignition only. It has a resistor pellet which is part of the vehicle's PASS-Key@II system. When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the plug from the door key. The plug has a code on it that tells the dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Theignition key has a bar code tag attached to it rather than a knock out plug. Your dealer or qualified locksmith can make extra ignition keys by reading the bar code tag. There are 15 alternative ignition PASS-Key I1 blanks to help discourage theft. Keep the bar code tag and the door key plugs in a safe place. If you lose your keys, you will be able to have new ones made using the plug or bar code tag. The oval key is for the doors and ail other locks. I NOTICE: ~ ~~ Your vehicle has a numberof new features that can help prevent theft.You can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you to ever lock your keys inside and you may have damage your vehicle to get in. Be sure you have extra keys. 2-3 Door Locks I A CAUTION: Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out. When adoor is locked, the inside handle won't open it. Outsiders can easilyenter through an unlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. This may not beso obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle ina crash if the doors aren't locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will befar better off whenever youdrive your vehicle. -- -- There are severalways to lock and unlock your vehicle. From the outside, use either thedoor key or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. If your vehicle has the optional theft-deterrent system, you must unlock the doors with the key or remote keyless entrytransmitter to avoid setting off the alarm. 2-4 Slide the manual lock lever down tolock the doorfrom the inside.To unlock the door, slide the lock lever up. Central Door Unlocking System Your vehicle will have this feature if it is equipped with the optional theft-deterrent system. When unlocking eitherdoor, you can also unlock the other door by holding the key in the turned position for a few seconds or by quickly rotatingthe door key twice in the lock cylinder. Power Door Locks lock. When thedoor is closed again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual or power lock to lock the door again. If you need to lock the doors before shifting out of PARK (P), use the manual or power lock button to lock the doors. Programmable Automatic Door Locks (If Equipped) With the ignition in RUN, the door locks can be programmed through prompts displayed by the Driver Information Center(DIC). These prompts allow the driver to choose various lock settings.For programming information, see“Programmable, Memory and Personalization Features” laterin this section. Anti-Lockout Feature Press the power door lock switch to lock or unlock both doors at once. Automatic Door Locks Close your doors and turn on the ignition. Every time you move the shift leverout of PARK (P), both of the doors will lock. The doors will unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move the shift lever into PARK (P). If someone needs to get out while your vehicle is not in PARK (P), have that person use the manual or power Leaving your key in any ignition position with either door open will disable the use of the power door lock switches as well as the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. If you close the doors, you can lock them using the remote keyless entrytransmitter. It is always recommended that you remove your ignition key when locking your vehicle. Note that the anti-lockout featurecan be overridden by holding the driver’s power door lock switch for three seconds or longer. 2-5 Leaving Your Vehicle If you are leaving the vehicle, open the door, set the locks from the inside, get outand close thedoor. Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System With this feature,you can lock and unlock thedoors, unlock the trunk, open the fuel door andturn on your vehicle’s interior lamps from about 10 feet (3 m) away using theremote keyless entry transmitter supplied withyour vehicle. Your remote keyless entry system operateson a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2-6 This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes ormodifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to usethis equipment. The rangeof this system is about 10 feet (3 m). At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry transmitter. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for thetransmitter to work, try this: 0 Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See the instructions that follow. 0 Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather. 0 Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again. 0 If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service. Operation & When you press this symbol to unlock the driver’s door, the parking lamps on your vehicle will blink twice. (You can program your vehicle so the parking lamps will not flash. For more information, see “LocWnlock Confirmation” later in this section.) Pressing itagain within five secondswill unlock the other doors. Pressing this button will also disarm the optional theft-deterrent system and turn on the interior lamps at night. 8 When you press this symbolto lock the doors, the parking lamps will blink once. (You can program your vehicle so the parking lamps will not flash. For more information, see“LockKJnlock Confirmation” later in this section.) This alsoarms the optional theft-deterrent system. a Press this symbol to open the trunk. (The valet button must be off.) Press this button to open the fuel door. (The valet button must be off.) Note that pressing the transmitter buttons numerous times (approximately 500 times) out of the vehicle’s operating range may cause the transmitter not to work. Replacing the battery and pressing the transmitter buttons 10 or more times out of range will also cause the transmitter not to work. To reset the transmitter, you must be within the vehicle’s operating range. Press and hold the trunk button, and within one second, press and hold the lock button. Continue to hold both buttons for approximately three seconds. See your dealer for service if your transmitter still doesn’t work properly. Matching Transmitter@)To Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitteris coded to prevent another transmitterfrom unlockmg your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only up to four transmitters matched to it. The remote keyless entry transmittercan also be used to recall the memory seats for up to two drivers. For more information, see“Memory Seat and Mirrors” in the Index. 2-7 Battery Replacement Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about four years. i You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get closeto your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it‘s probably time to change the battery. NOTICE: When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter. 2-8 I 1 . Use the round end of the door key or a coin to pry open the transmitter. d Trunk r A CAUTION: ? !,i 2 . Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil to remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. 3. Remove and replace the battery. Insert the new battery as the instructionsunder the cover indicate. b“ P 1 f9 4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly tobe sure no moisture can enter. 5. Resynchronize the transmitter by pressing and holding the lock and unlock buttons for about eight seconds within range of the vehicle. Once the transmitter is resynchronized, the horn will chirp and the exterior lamps will flash. It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open becausecarbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t seeor smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal betweenthe body and the trunk lid: Make sure all windows are shut. n r n the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed withthe setting on AUTOor ECON and the temperature between 65°F (18°C) and 85°F (29°C). That will force outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” inthe Index. If you have air outlets onor under the instrument panel, openthem all the way. See “EngineExhaust” in the Index. 2-9 Trunk Storage System (Option) Trunk Lock Release R TRUNK I To use this feature, your vehicle must be in PARK (P) and the valet button must be on. Press the TRUNK release button, located above the radio on the Driver Information Center (DIC), to open the trunk. ACCESS PANEL RETAINER TRUNK STORAGE UNIT SPARE TIRE COVER You can also press the trunk button on the remote keyless entry transmitterto access the trunk compartment. SPARE TIRE I If equipped, the optional trunk storage system can be used to organize many different items inside the trunk. To install the storage system: 1. Pull the carpeting from the floor of the trunk. Turn the retainer (center dial) on the compact spare tire cover to the left to remove it. 2-10 3 I . Place the trunk storage system on the center of the trunk floor (the cut out portion of the storage system should be facing the rear of the vehicle). 3. Open the storage systemby pulling up on the handle located in the carpeted area. This allows the unit to fold up into place. Fold the divider wallsopen and move them into the retention slots. 4. Remove the rectangular accesspanel from the floor of the storage system. The access panel should unsnap by hand. 5. Center the storage system access hole over the area where the spare tire is secured by the retainer. Position the storage system as needed and then secure it with the retainer. 6. Replace the access panel. 7. Attach the removable net to the slots locatedon the front of the divider walls and attach the hooks to the holes on each side of the storage system. The following steps explainhow to remove the trunk storage system for cleaning orin case you need to access the spare tire.Follow all of these stepsif the storage system is in the closed position. Begin with Step 2 if the system is already open. 1. Open the storage system by pulling up on the handle located in the carpeted area. This allowsthe unit to fold up into place. Fold the divider walls open and move them into the retention slots. 2. Remove the rectangular access panel from the floor of the storage system. Theaccess panel should unsnap by hand. 3. Center the storage system access hole over the area where the spare tire is securedby the retainer. Position the storage system as needed and then remove the retainer (turn the retainer to the left to remove it). 4. Replace the access panel and remove the storage system. Once in place, the storage system can be moved forward or rearward for convenience and easy access of stored items. 2-11 Trunk Lid Automatic Pull-Down Feature 1 A CAUTION: Your car may have an automatic pull-down feature that helps closethe trunk electronically. Your fingers can be trapped under the trunk lid as it goes down. Yourfingers could be injured, and you would need someoneto help you free them. Keepyour fingers away from the trunk lid as you close it andas it is going down. With the automaticpull-down feature, you never have to slam the trunk lid in orderto close the trunk. Instead, gently lower the trunk liduntil it is nearly shut -- the automatic pull-down unit will take over and lock the trunk firmly. I / - B A. Trunk Lid B. Lever If for some reason thetrunk lid (A) will not close, it may be because the trunk pull-down unit was accidently bumped. Even though the trunk lid remains open, the motor from the pull-down unit has already cycled down. If this happens, press the lever (B) on the trunk lid. The pull-down unit motor will reset itself allowing the trunk lid to closewhen lowered. Theft Parking Lots Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities. Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are waysyou can help. If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’sbest to lock it upand take your keys. But what if you have to leave your ignition key? Key in the Ignition If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joyriders or professional thieves -- so don’t do it. When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take itwith you. Always do this. so will your Your steering wheel will be locked, and ignition and transaxle. And remember to lock the doors. e If possible, park in abusy, well lit area. e Put your valuables in a storage area, like your and lock the trunk or glove box. Be sure to close storage area. Close all windows. Lock the glove box. Lock all the doors exceptthe driver’s. Then take the door key and remote keyless entry transmitter with you. Parking at Night Park in a lighted spot, closeall windows and lock your vehicle. Remember tokeep your valuables out of sight. Put them in a storage area, or take them with you. 2-13 the theft-deterrentsystem won’t activate if Theft-Deterrent System (If Equipped) Remember, you lock a door with a key or use the manual door lock. SECURITY If the ignition is off and either door is open, the SECURITY light will flash, reminding you to activate the system. It activates only if you use a power door lock switch or the remote keylessentry transmitter. To avoid activating the alarm by accident: Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter. (Pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter disablesthe theft-deterrent system.) Unlocking a door any other way will activate the alarm. Cycling the ignition without disarmingthe theft-deterrent system will also activate the alarm. The light will also flash if the battery has been disconnected and reconnected. To activate the theft-deterrent system: 1. Open the door. 2. Lock the door using the power door lock or the remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY light should come on and stay on. 3. Close both doors. The SECURITY light should go off within about 30 seconds. The horn will sound and the lamps will flash for about 30 seconds when a door or the trunk is opened without the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter. The horn also sounds if the locks aredamaged. 2-14 0 The vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doorsare closed if you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent system. If you activate thealarm by accident, unlock either door with yourkey. You can also turn off the alarrn by using the unlockbutton of the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any otherway. Testing the Alarm 1. From inside the vehicle. roll down the window, then get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open. 2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open, lock the vehicle using the power door lock or the remote keyless entry transmitterand close the door. Wait 30 seconds until the SECURITY light goes off. 3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual lock and open the door. The horn will sound and the headlamps will flash. If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see "Fuses and Circuit Breakers" in the Index. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you may need to have your vehicle serviced. To reduce the possibility of theft, always activate the Valet Lockout Button Pressing the VALET button located inside the glove box will disable the use of the power trunk, fuel door and garage door openers. Pressing this button again will make these featuresreusable. Locking the glove box with the door key will also help to secure your vehicle. Note that the remote keyless entry transmitter can't be used to open the trunk or fuel door if the VALET button is pressed in. theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle. 2-15 PASS-Key@I1 Your vehicle is equippea with the PASS-Key I1 theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key I1 is a passive system. The system is armed when the key is removed from the ignition. PASS-Key I1 uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key that is read by the system in your vehicle. If the key resistor matches the code stored in the vehicle system, the vehicle’s fuel and starting systems will be enabled. If an incorrect key is used, the vehicle’s fuel and starting systems are disabled for three minutes. Additional attempts during this lockoutperiod will not start the car, even with the correct key. 2-16 If the engine does not start and the STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY message is displayed in the Driver Information Center. your key should be checked for damage. Starting may be attempted with an undamaged key immediately. See your dealer or a locksmith for key service. If the STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY and WAIT 3 MINUTES messages are displayed,the key should be cleaned. After three minutes, try again. A START CAR message will appear at this time.If the engine still does not start, wait three minutes and try a duplicate key. At this time, fuses should bechecked (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).If the engine does not start with the duplicate key, your vehicle needs service. See your dealer for service. If the THEFT SYSTEM PROBLEM, CAR MAY NOT START message is displayed during vehicle operation, a fault has been detected in the system. This means the PASS-Key I1 system is disabled and is not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts. See your dealer forservice. If an ignition key is lost or damaged, see your dealer or a locksmith to have a new key made. New Vehicle “Break-In” Ignition Positions C NOTICE: Your vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate “break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you followthese guidelines: 0 Don’t drive at any one speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles (805 km). Don’t make full-throttle starts. 0 Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new liningscan mean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings. 0 Don’t tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more information. -- -- i A i L E With the ignition key in the ignition, you can turn the switch to five different positions. ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use thmgs likt the radio and the windsheld wipers when the engine is off. To get into ACCESSORY, push in the key and turn it toward you. The steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was before you inserted the key. Once you turn the key to ACCESSORY, be sure to then turn it to LOCK. If you leave your key in ACCESSORYwhen the engine is turned off, your battery will discharge prematurely. 2-17 LOCK (B):Before you put the key in, the ignition will be in LOCK. This is the only position in which you can remove the key. This position locks the ignition, steering wheel and transaxle. It’s a theft-deterrent feature. NOTICE: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it,be sure you are using the correct key;if so, is it all theway in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand. key or the Using a tool to force it could break the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. OFF ( C ) :This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering wheel like LOCK does. UseOFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engineis off (for example, if your vehicle is being pushed). RUN (D): This isthe position for driving. START (E):This position starts the engine. 2-18 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) The following accessorieson your vehicle may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned from RUN to OFF, and then to LOCK: 0 Radio Power Windows Astroroof Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or if either door is opened. If you want power for another 10 minutes, turn the ignition key to RUN, OFF and then to LOCK. NOTICE: When using RAP,always leave yourkey in LOCK. If you leave yourkey in any other position than LOCK, your batterywill discharge prematurely. 1 NOTICE: Starting Your Engine Move your shift lever toPARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N). Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a safety feature.To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Holding yourkey in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. I NOTICE: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Cadillac is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped. ~ 2. If it doesn’t start right away. hold your key in START for about three seconds at a time until your engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter. I. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turnyour ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm. 2-19 3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. NOTICE: Your engine is designed towork with the electronics inyour vehicle. If you add electrical the way parts or accessories, you could change the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly. If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. 2-20 Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped) I In very cold weather, 0°F (- 18OC) or colder, the engine coolant heatercan help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. A CAUTION: Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t. it could be damaged. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,the kind of oil you have, and some other things.Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice forthat particular area. Automatic Transaxle Operation P R There are severaldifferent positions for theshift lever. N 0 3 2 1 PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start the engine because your vehicle can’t moveeasily. 2-21 ’ 1 A CAUTION: It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehiclecan roll. Don’t leave your vehicle whenthe engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a nailer” in the Index. Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine.Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI).You have to fully apply your regular brakesbefore you can shift from PARK (P) 2-22 when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever -- push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and release the shift lever button on the floor shift console models as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. (Press the shift lever button before moving the shift lever on floor shift console models.) See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in this section. REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. NOTICE: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transaxle. Shift to REVERSE (R)only after your vehicle has stopped. Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle. See “If You’re Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the lndex foradditional information. p“ i f NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesn’t connect with the wheels.To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. A CAUTION: r Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could losecontrol and hitpeople or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing. #- I 1 r r r NOTICE: ~~ Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered byyour warranty. OVERDRIVE (@):This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you’re: Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the accelerator pedal about halfway down. Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. The transaxle will shift down to the next gear and have more power. I NOTICE: d If your vehicle seems tostart up rather slowly, or if it doesn’t seemto shift gears as you accelerate, something may be wrong with a transaxle system sensor. If you drive very far thatway, your vehicle can be damaged. So if this happens, have your vehicle servicedright away. Until then,you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and OVERDRIVE (0) for higher speeds. 2-23 THIRD (3): This positionis also used for normal driving, however, it offersmore power and lower fuel economy thanOVERDRIVE (@). Here are examples forusing THIRD (3) instead of OVERDRIVE (0): When driving on hilly, winding roads. When towing a trailer, so there is less sh[ifting between gears. When going down a steep hill. SECOND (2): This positiongives you more power. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steepmountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on. ~- NOTICE: ~~~ ~~ ~~~~ Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless youare going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage your engine. FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. (If the shift lever isput in FIRST (l),the transaxle won’t shift into gearuntil the vehicle is going slowly enough.) NOTICE: If your front wheels can’trotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you werestuck in very deepsand or mud or were~up against a solid object. You could damageyour transaxle. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehiclethere with only the accelerator pedal. This could cause overheating and damage the transaxle.Use your brakes tohold your vehicle in position ona hill. Parking Brake Hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot to set the parking brake. If the ignition is on, the PARK BRAKE indicator light should come on. If it doesn’t, you need to have your vehicle serviced. If the parking brake has not been fully released and you try to drive with the parking brake on, the PARK BRAKE indicator light comes on and stays on. See “Parking Brake Indicator Light“ in the Index for more information. When you move out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), if the engine is running, the parking brake should release. If it doesn’t, you can manually release the parking brake. Be sure to turn off the ignition and put the vehicle in PARK (P) before manually releasing the brake. Reach under the driver’s sideof the instrument panel and pull on the manual release lever, which is located above the parking brake pedal. If the parking brake does not release, you should either driveto the nearest service station or have your vehicle towed. 2-25 A CAUTION: Always shift to PARK(P) before pulling the manual release lever. If your hand or arm is in the way of the pedal you could be hurt. The pedal springs back quickly. Keep your hand and arm away when you use the manual releaselever. NOTICE: Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them andyou could also damage other parts of your vehicle. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. This sectionshows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving. 2-26 Shifting Into PARK (P) A CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift leveris not fully in PARK(P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see“Towing a Trailer” in the Index. Console Shift Lever 1. Hold the brake pedaldown with your right foot. 2 . Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this: Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running A CAUTION: It canbe dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running.Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don't leave your vehicle with the engine running unlessyou have to. 3. Hold in the button on the lever and push the lever all the way toward the frontof your vehicle. 4. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal down, set the parking brake. 5 . Turn the ignition key to LOCK. 6. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P). If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running. be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you've moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn't fully locked into PARK (P). 2-27 Torque Lock Shifting Out of PARK (P) If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transaxle intoPARK (P) properly, the weight of .the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle.You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find outhow, see “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in the Index. Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to fullyapply your regular brakes before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index. If torque lock doesoccur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure fromthe parking pawl in the transaxle,so you can pull the shift lever of outPARK (P). .-._ If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever-- push the shift leverall the way into PARK (P) and also release the shift leverbutton on the shift lever asyou maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you want. (Press the shift leverbutton before moving the shift-lever.)If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shiftout of PARK (P), try this: 1. Turn the ignition keyto OFF.Open and close the driver’s door to turn off the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) feature. 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. 3. Shift toNEUTRAL (N). 4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drivegear you want. 5 . Take your vehicle to an authorized service centeras soon asyou can. 2-28 Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust A CAUTION: l a I A CAUTION: Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves,dry grass or other things that can burn. Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide(CO), which you can’t seeor smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. You might have exhaust coming in if: Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. Your vehicle was damaged in acollision. Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the roador over road debris. Repairs weren’t done correctly. Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle: Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; and Have your vehicle fixed immediately. 2-29 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked It’s better not to park with the engine running.But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know. I A CAUTION: I Idling the engine withthe climate control system off could allowdangerous exhaust into your vehicle (seethe earlier Caution under “Engine Exhaust”). Also, idling ina closed-in placecan let deadly carbon monoxide (CO)into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust with CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running. Another closed-in place can bea blizzard. (See “Blizzard” inthe Index.) -- 2-30 -- A CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re fairly on level ground, always set your parking brake after you move the shift lever to PARK (P). Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. Express-Down Window Windows Power Windows F,.. . The controls are located near each window. Press the control forward to raise the window and press rearward to lower. Note that the second rearward position on the driver's control operates theexpress-down window feature. This feature is present on the driver's power window. Pressing the controlrearward into the second position then releasing it will lower thewindow completely. If you want to stop the window as it is lowering, press the control forward. Pressthe control forward to raise the window. Note that the first position on the control operates the driver's power window in the non-express mode. Horn The horn can be sounded by pressing on the center of the steering wheel pad. Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). When you stop your vehicle and turn the ignition key to OFF, you can still use your power windows. The electrical power to operate the windows will not shut off until you open a door or 10 minutes have passed. If you want this power for another 10 minutes, turn the key to RUN and back to OFF. 2-31 Tilt Wheel .. ., Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever Turn and Lane Change Signals To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down, The lever returns automatically when the turn is complete. 1 I c7 Tilt steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. Raising the steeringwheel to the highest level gives your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you to tilt the wheel. Adjust the steering wheel to a comfortable position and then release the lever to lock the wheel in place. 2-32 An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is complete. The lever returns when it's released. If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime will sound and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display TURN SIGNAL ON (after driving about 1 mile (1.6 km/h)) to remind you to turn it off. Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or lane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb. Other drivers won’t see the turn signal. Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible accidents. Check the fuse(see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs if the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn. Flash-To-Pass This lets you use the high-beam headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass. Pull the turn signal lever toward you to use. When you do: 0 If the headlamps are eitheroff or in the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever there. Release the lever to turn them off. 0 If the headlamps are on low beam, they will shift to high beam and stay there. Pull the lever toward you to return to low beam. 0 If the headlamps are on high beam, they will switch to low beam. To return to high beam. pull the lever toward you. Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer Pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you and then release it to change the headlamps from low beam to high or from high beam to low. This light on the instrument panel will be on, indicating high beam usage. 2-33 Windshield Wipers OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn off the wipers. Be sure to clear iceand snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they're frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. Rainsense Wipers (ETC Only) WIPER: Turn the band on the turn signal lever to control the wipers. MISE Turn the band toward you and then release it for a single wipe cycle, For more cycles, hold the band on MIST longer. LO or HI: Turn the band away from you to either LO (low speed) or to HI (high speed), depending on the wiper speed you want. DELAY: You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes with this setting. Move theband to the DELAY position. The closer you move it toLO, the longer the delay. (Eldorado Only) 2-34 This moisture sensor is mounted on the passenger's interior side of the windshield behind the rearview mirror and is used to automatically operate the wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture that is on the windshield. The Rainsense system can be activated by turning the wiper stalk to one of the five sensitivity levelswithin the AUTO DELAY area. The AUTO DELAY position closest to OFF is the lowest sensitivity setting. This allows more water to collect on the windshield between wipes. Rotating the stalkaway from you to the other AUTO DELAY settings increases thesensitivity of the system and frequency of wipes. A single wipe will occur each time you turn the wiper stalk to a higher sensitivity level. An initial wipe occurs when you turn the ignition on as a reminder that Rainsense is active. The windshield wipers also remain in a “highpark” position (when the wipers are stopped onthe windshield and are not in its normal park position), even when the ignition is turned off. The Rainsense wipers operate in a delay mode as well as a continuouslow or high speed depending on the amount of moisture and the sensitivity level. The MIST and “wash” cycles operate as normal and are not affected by the Rainsense function. I NOTICE: I The wipers must be turned off when going through a car wash to avoid damage. It is important to note that the Rainsense wiping feature (AUTO DELAY) can be overridden at any time by manually changing the wiper control to LO or HI speed. If you ever need to replace the windshield, make sure it is Rainsense compatible. Windshield Washer A CAUTION: In freezing weather, don’tuse your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can formice on the windshield, blocking your vision. At the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever, there is a paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, press and release this paddle. The wipers will clear the windshield and either stop or return to your preset speed. For more washer cycles, press and hold the paddle. LOW WASHER FLUID will be displayed on the Driver Information Center(DIC) when the washer fluid reaches a low level. Cruise control shuts off when you apply your brakes. NOTICE: Driving without washer fluid can bedangerous. A bad mud splash can blockyour vision and you could hit another vehicle or go off the road. Check the washer fluid level often. J Cruise Control A CAUTION: Cruise control can be dangerous where you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. (See“Traction Control System” in the Index.) When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise controlback on. With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can help on long trips. Cruise control doesnot work at speeds below 25 mph (40 k d ) . 2-36 Setting Cruise Control IA CAUTION: If you leave your cruise control switch on when you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when youdon’t want to. You could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you wantto use it. 1. Move the cruise control switch to ON. 2. Accelerate to the speed you want. 3. Press the SET CRUISE button at the end of the lever and release it. The CRUISE ENGAGEDmessage will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). 4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Resuming aSet Speed Setting the cruise control at a desired speed and then applying the brake will end the cruise function. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 M h ) or more, you can move the cruise control switch from ON to RIA (Resume/Accelerate) for abouthalf a second to reset. This returns you to your desired preset speed. Also note that the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display the CRUISE ENGAGED message again. Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer than half a second, the vehicle will accelerate until you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at WA. Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two waysto go to a higher speed: Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Push the button at the end of the lever and then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it there until you reach a desired speed and then release the switch. (To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to WA. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph ( 1.6 km/h) faster.) The accelerate featurewill only work after you have set the cruise control speed by pushing the SET CRUISE button. 2-37 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control Using Cruise Control on Hills There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control: How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to stepon the Push in the button at the end of the lever until you reach a desired lower speed, then release it. A CRUISE ENGAGED message will then display in the Driver Information Center (DIC). To slow down in very small amounts, push the button for less than half a second.Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h)slower. accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keepyour speed down. Of course, applying the brakes or downshifting intoFIRST (1) takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use cruisecontrol on steep hills. Ending Cruise Control Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. There are two ways to end cruise control: Step lightly on the brake pedal. Move the CRUISE switch to OFF. Erasing Speed Memory The cruise controlset speed memory is erased when you turn off the cruise control or the ignition. 2-38 Exterior Lamps The control on the left side of the instrument panel controls these lamp systems: Pull the lamp control knob out to the first stop to turn on the parking and taillamps, sidemarker lamps and instrument panel lights. Pull the knob out all the way to turn on the headlamps. Push the control knob all the way back in to turn the lamps and lights off. Cluster lighting aswell as instrument panel backlighting will dim only when it is dark outside. Wiper Activated Headlamps This feature activates theheadlamps and parlung lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use for approximately 20 seconds. 0 Headlamps 0 Taillamps 0 Parking Lamps 0 Sidemarker Lamps 0 License Plate Lamp 0 Underhood Lamp 0 Fog Lamps 0 Instrument Panel Lights 0 Interior Courtesy Lamps In order to operate the wiper activated headlamps, the twilight sentinel myst be turned on. This feature lights the way in poor weather and it also makes your vehicle more visible to other drivers. If the wiper activated headlamps are on, and the ignition switch is turned off. the wiper activated headlamps will immediately turn off. The wiper activated headlamps will deactivate if you turn off the twilight sentinel or if the windshield wipers have been turned off for aperiod of one or two seconds. 2-39 Lamps On Reminder You will hear a warning chime if you open either door while leaving the lamps on, if the manual headlamp control is activated.An exception to this is when you’re using twilight sentinel. Daytime Running Lamps Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)can make it easier for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawnand before sunset. The DRL system will make the high-beam headlamps come on at reduced brightness when: 0 the ignition is on, the headlamp switch is off and the transaxle is not in PARK (P). When DRL are on, onlyyour high-beam headlamps (at reduced brightness) willbe on. No other exteriorlamps such as the parking lamps, taillamps, etc.will be on when the DRL are being used. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either. 2-40 When the twilight sentinel switch is on and it’s dark enough outside, the high-beam headlamps (at reduced intensity) will turn off and normal low-beam headlamp operation will occur. When the twilight sentinel switch is on and it’s bright enough outside, the regular lamps will go off, and the high-beam headlamps at reduced brightness will take over forthe DRL. If it’s dark enough outside and the twilight sentinel control is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). This message informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps is recommended even though the DRL are still illuminated (it’s become dark enough outside to require the headlamps and/or otherexterior lamps). Turning on the twilight sentinel, the headlamp switch or the fog lamp switch will remove the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message. To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, turn off the twilight sentinel switch and shift the transaxle into PARK (P). Placing your vehicle in PARK (P) disables the DRL. The DRL will stay off until you shift out of PARK (PI. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it. Twilight Sentinel Fog Lamps Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. When you press the fog lamp button, a small indicator light will tell you that the fog lampsand the parking lamps are on. Press the button again to turn them off. If you switch on the high-beam headlamps. the fog lamps will turn off. They'll turn back on again when you switch to low-beam headlamps. When the twilight sentinel ison and the fog lamp switch is activated. the fog lamps will remain on as well as the headlamps and parking lamps. Cornering Lamps The control is next to the headlarnp knob. It automatically switches the lamps on and off by sensing how dark it is outside. To operate the twilight sentinel, leave the lamp knob off and move the TWILIGHT control toany position but OFF. If you move the control all the way to the right, the lamps will remain on for approximately threeminutes after the ignitionhas been turned to OFF or LOCK. If you move the control so it is just on, the lamps will go off quickly when you turn the ignition switch out of RUN. You can adjust the delay time from only a few seconds to three minutes. The cornering lamps comeon when the headlamps or parking lamps are on and you signal a turn. They provide more light for cornering. 2-41 If it’s dark enough outside and the twilight sentinel control is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). This message informs the driverthat turning on the exterior lamps is recommended (it’s become dark enough outside to require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps).Turning on the twilight sentinel,the headlamp switch or the foglamp switch will remove the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message. Light Sensor Exterior Lighting Battery Saver If the manual parking lamp control hasbeen left on, the exterior lamps will turn off approximately 10 minutes after the ignitionis turned to LOCK or ACCESSORY. This protects drainingthe battery in case you have accidently left the headlamps or parking lamps on. If you need to purposely leave the lamps on for more than 10 minutes with the ignition in LOCK or ACCESSORY, turn the manual control knob off and then back on. To delay the lamps from turning off, see “Twilight Sentinel” earlierin this section. ’.. ._,;, . ,‘ ,: , . I !,;‘ .. . .,<.,,.>.::.’ ,..:I .~ , , ?,’, :..”;:,$):,$ Interior Lamps ’ , ,: Instrument Panel Brightness Control Cluster lighting as well as instrument panel lighting automatically dims when it becomes dark outside and your lights are on.When it’s dark, the brightness control can be manually adjusted. Clusterlighting and instrument panel lighting automatically brighten when it becomes light outside. The light sensor for the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the twilight sentinel is located in the center of the front defogger grille. If you cover the sensor, itwill read “dark” and the lamps will come on. Illuminated Entry The illuminated entry system turns on the courtesy lamps and the backlighting to the door switches and to the lamp control knob when a door is opened or if you press a remote keyless entry transmitter button. Since the illuminated entry system has a photocell, this means that it must be dark outside in order for the courtesy lamps or backlightingto turn on. The courtesy lamps turn off approximately 20 seconds after the last dooris closed or after the ignition key is placed in the ignition. Parade Dimming This feature prohibits backlightingand the dimming of the instrument panel lights during daylight while the headlamps are on. This feature operateswith the light sensor for the twilight sentinel and is fully automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness outside, the instrument panel lights can be adjusted. Backlighting to the instrument panelwill also turn on. Reading Lamps The reading lamps are located in the roof. These lamps and the interior courtesylamps automatically come on when either dooris opened and it is dark outside. For manual operation, press the button to turn them on. Press it again toturn them off. If the reading lamps are left on. rney automatically shut off I O minutes after the ignition has been turned off. Inadvertent Power Battery Saver This feature isdesigned to protect your vehicle’s battery against drainage from the interior lamps,trunk lamp, glove box lamp, cigarette lighters or the garage door opener. When the ignition is turned off, the power to these featureswill automatically turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes if a new car has I5 miles (24 km)or less). Power will be restored for an additional 10 minutes if either dooris opened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switch is turned on. Storage Mode Personalization This feature is for longterm use and must be programmed through the Driver Information Center (DIC) while the ignition is in RUN. Storage mode personalization protects the battery by placing your vehicle in a storage mode so that the radio, amplifiers, instrument clusterand remote keyless entry will not drain the battery over a longperiod of time. For programming information, see “Programmable, Memory and Personalization Features”later in this section. 2-43 Mirrors Mirror Operation Electrochrornic Daymight Rearview Mirror When this featureis turned on, the mirror automatically changes to reduce glarefrom headlamps behind you. A photocell on the mirror senseswhen it is becoming dark outside. Another photocell, built into the mirror face, senses when headlamps are behind you. At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will gradually darken to reduce glare (thischange may take a few seconds). The mirror will return to its clear daytime state when the glare is reduced. To turn on the automatic dimming feature, press AUTO. To turn off automatic dimming, press OFF. The green indicator lightwill be illuminated when this feature is active. Time Delay The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which prevents unnecessary switching from thenight back to the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing of the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic. 2-44 Cleaning the Photocells r I Use a cotton swab andglass cleaner to clean the photocells when necessary. I Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror with Compass (If Equipped) i When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven. When cleaning themirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleanerto enter the mirror housing. Mirror Operation r 1 r r I 1 Your vehicle may have an electrochromic inside rearview mirror with a compass. When set in the MIRROR position, this mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you. The mirror also includesan eight-point compass display inthe upper right corner of the mirror face. The right sideof the switch locatedat the bottom of the mirror turns the electrochromic mirror on and off. To turn on the automatic dimming feature, press MIRROR. To turn off automatic dimming,press M m O R again. The green indicator lightwill be illuminated when this feature is active. 2-45 Compass Operation To adjust forcompass variance: Press the COMPASS switch once to turn the compass on or off. 1. Use the COMPASS button located at the bottom of When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the compass will show two character boxes for approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display the compass heading. 2. Press and hold the COMPASS button until a zone If, aftertwo seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading (“N’ for North, for example), there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item. Compass Variance The mirror isset .in zone eightupon leaving the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compassvariance if you live outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during along distance cross-country trip, it willbe necessary to adjustfor compass variance. Compass variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance, your compass could give false readings. 2-46 the mirror. number appears in the display. 3. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map. 4. Press the COMPASS button on the bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display. After you stop pressingthe button, the display will show a “C” in the direction display within a few seconds. (This is the automatic calibration mode -- you’ll need to drive in a circle to calibrate the mirror. See “Compass Calibration” following.) Power Remote Control Mirror (Heated) Your vehicle has an electric mirror control located on the driver‘s door armrest. Compass Calibration If the letter “C” appears in the compass display, the mirror may need calibration. The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways: Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/hj or less until the display reads a direction, or Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine. Move the switch in the middle of the control to choose the right or leftmirror. To adjust the mirror, push the arrow control in the direction you want the mirror to go. Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle. The mirrors can also be programmed for personalization if you have the optional memory package. For more information, see “Memory Seat and Mirrors” in the Index. 2-47 Driver’s Outside Auto-Dimming Rearview Mirror Only the driver’s side outsidemirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the electrochromic mirror. See “Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror” earlier in this section. Curb View Assist Mirror(If Equipped) If your mirror is equipped with memory mirrors, it will also be equipped with the curb view assist mirror feature. Thisfeature will cause the passenger mirror to tilt when the vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R). This feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb when you are parallel parking. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a five second delay has occurred, the passenger mirror will return to its original position. If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted, the mirror switch may be used. The mirror then returns to itsoriginal position. 2-48 Convex Outside Mirror Your passenger‘s side mirroris convex. A convex mirror’s surfaceis curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat. Thismirror does not have a dimming feature. A CAUTION: A convex mirror can make things (like other are. vehicles) look farther away than they really you If you cut too sharply into the right lane, could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Storage Compartments Center Console Storage Area Glove Box The glove box is located in front of the passenger’s seat. To lock the glove box door, insert the oval key into the lock cylinder and turn it to the right. Turn the key to the left to unlock the door. Overhead Console Sunglasses Storage Compartment This feature is on vehicles without the optional astroroof. To gain access to this compartment, which is located directly above the inside rearview mirror in the headliner, push up and the storage area will open. Map Pocket The map/storage pockets are locatedon each front door as well as on the passenger’s and driver’s front seatbacks. The console includesa storage compartment for CDs or tapes and an optional phone, an armrest and a cupholder. The cupholder can be opened by pressing on the surface panel located in front of the armrest. Close the lid to secure. 2-49 Rear Storage Armrest (If Equipped) Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear seat armrest which includes an open storage compartment and a dual cupholder that unfolds for use. To open, lift the front edge. (This feature is availableon vehicles with leather interiors only.) Convenience Net NOTICE: - Don’t put papers or other flammable items or other into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes smoking materials could ignite them, causing a damaging fire. The convenience net is located insidethe back wall of the trunk. Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can helpkeep them from fallingover during sharp turns or quick starts and stops. The cigarette lighteris located near the ashtray. Press it all the way in and release. It will pop back by itself when it‘s ready to light. You may also have a lighter located at the rear seat air outlet. The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the trunk as farforward as you can. When not using the net, hook the net to the tabs securing it tothe sill plate. Note that power to the cigarette lighterwill shut off 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. This helps to prevent battery drainage. For more information. see “Inadvertent Battery Saver” earlier in this section. Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Press on the cover, which is located below the climate control system, to reveal the front ashtray. To clean this ashtray, pull it out by gripping the sides. To use the rearashtray, lift the lid. 2-50 NOTICE: ~~ Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be ableto back away from the heating element when it’s ready. That can makeit overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element. Sun Visors OnStar System (Option) Swing down the visor to block out glare. Itcan also be detached from the center mount and moved to the side. The driver’s sunshade is also equipped with a storage flap that can be used for maps or toll tickets. This system may be ordered through your dealer and will include the optional fixed cellular telephone. The following services are available24 hours a day: 0 Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror Turn the sunshade down and lift the coverto see the mirror. Move the slide switchup or down to brighten or dim the lamp. Cellular Telephone (Option) Your vehicle has been prewired for dealer installationof a Cadillacdual-mode (analog/digital) cellular telephone. A fixed mobile or a portable hand-held system are available. Either system has steering wheel telephone controls and information outputthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC). Voice activation and hands-free operation are standard features. For more information, contactyour dealer. A user’s guide is provided with the telephone. Roadside Service with Location Emergency Services Button 0 Remote Door Unlock Theft Detectioflotification and Stolen-Vehicle Tracking 0 Automatic Notification of Front Air Bag Deployment 0 Concierge/Customer Convenience Services For more information, contactyour dealer. Assist Handles A handle, located on each side pillar, can be used when getting out of your vehicle. Garment Hooks For your convenience, a garment hook is attached to the assist handle. 2-51 Floor Mats Your vehicle is equipped with rubber-backed front and rear floor mats. Keep them clean by vacuuming and using a spotcleaner, if necessary. Do not machine wash. Astroroof (Option) Press and hold the switch forward to close the glass panel. The sunshade can only be closed by hand. To vent, press theswitch forward when the glass panel is closed. Open the sunshade by hand. To close the vent, press the switchrearward. Universal Transmitter (Option) I The control switch only works when the ignition is on or when the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. Press the switch rearward and release to express-open the glass panel and sunshade. The sunshade can also be opened by hand. If you want to stop the roof in a partially opened position, press the switch in either direction. Press and release the switch again to open it fully. 2-52 This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: ( 1 ) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complieswith RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1j this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference thatmay cause undesired operationof the device. Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facilitycould void authorization to use this equipment. the two outside buttonson the universal transmitter until the amber light begins to flash rapidly (approximately 20 seconds). Then release the buttons. Thisprocedure initializes the memory and erases any previous settings forall three channels. 2 . Decide which one of the three channels you want to program. Programming the Transmitter 3. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter against the front surfaceof the universal transmitter so that you can still see the amber light. Do not use the universal transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse” safety feature. This includesany garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. 4. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter button and the desired button on the universal transmitter. Continue to press both buttons through Step 5. Be sure that people and objects are clearof the garage door you are programming. 5. Hold down both buttons until you see the amber light on the universal transmitter flash slowly and then rapidly. The rapid flashing,which could takeup to 90 seconds, indicates thatthe universal transmitter has been programmed. Release both buttons once the light startsto flash rapidly. Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to program up to three channels: 1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down 2-53 If you have trouble programming the universal transmitter, make sure that you have followed the directions exactly as described and that the battery in the hand-held transmitter is not dead. If you still cannot program it, rotate the hand-held transmitter end over end and try again. The universal transmitter may not work with older garage door openers that do not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards. If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated attempts, consult your dealer. Be sure tokeep the original hand-held transmitter in case you need to erase and reprogram the universal transmitter. Note to Canadian Owners:During programming, the hand-held transmitter may stop transmitting after one or two seconds. If you are programming from one of these transmitters, you should press and re-press the button on the hand-held transmitter every two seconds without ever releasingthe button on the universal transmitter. Release both buttons when the amber light on the universal transmitter begins to flashrapidly. Operating the Transmitter Press and hold the appropriate button on the universal transmitter. The amber light comes on while the signal is being transmitted. Note that the universal transmitter is disabled when the valet button inside the glove box is activated. For more information, see “Valet Lockout Button” earlier in this section. Also note that if the hand-held transmitter appears to program the universal transmitter but does not open your garage door, and if the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the garage door opener may have a “rolling code” system. A rolling code system changes the code of the garage door opener every time you open or close the garage door. To determine if you have this system, press the button on the universal transmitter that you have programmed already. If the amber light on the universal transmitter flashes rapidly for one or two seconds and then stops flashing, the garage door opener has a rolling code system. In a rolling code system, the garage door receiver must be trained to the universal transmitter. Training a Garage Door Opener with “Rolling Codes”(If Equipped) If you have not previously programmed the hand-held transmitter to the universal transmitter. see “Programming the Transmitter” earlier in this section. If you have completed this programming already. you now need to train the garage door opener receiver to recognize the universal transmitter. Refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual for the proper transmitter training procedure foryour garage door opener brand. 1. Locate the training button on the garage door opener receiver. The exact locationand color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If you have difficulty locating the training button. refer to your garage door opener manual. 2 . Press the training button on the garage door opener A light indicator receiver for one or two seconds. will begin to flash when the receiver enters the train mode. 3. Return to the universal transmitter in your vehicle and press the universal transmitter button you have already programmed for two to three seconds. Press the button again to make surethat the universal transmitter has been trained to the garage door opener receiver. Check that the training was successful. The receiver light should no longer be flashing. The garage door opener shouldnow recognize the universal transmitter. You may either use the universal transmitter orthe hand-held transmitter toopen the garage door. If after following these instructionsyou still have problems training the garage door opener, consult your dealer. Erasing Channels To erase all three-programmed channels,hold down the two outside buttons untilthe red light begins to flash. Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be reprogrammed using the procedure for Programming the transmitter explained earlier. Accessories Accessories forthe universal transmitter are available from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like additional information, please call 1-800-355-35 15. 2-55 Instrument Panel / \ I J 2-56 The instrument panel IS designed to letyou know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using and many of the other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically. The main components of the instrument panel are: A. Air Outlets H. Hood Release B. Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever C. Cluster D. Radio (Audio System) E. Driver Information Center Control Buttons F. LampControls G. HVAC Steering Wheel Controls (or Cellular Telephone Controls, If Equipped) I. Horn J. Audio Steering Wheel Controls K. Shift Lever L. Climate Control Panel M. Glove Box 2-57 Cluster United States versionshown, Canadian similar Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h). The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). You may wonder what happens if a vehicle has to have a new odometer installed. The new one may read the correct mileage. This is because your vehicle’s computer has stored the mileage in memory. Trip Odometer TRIP RESET I By pressing this button, you-can tell how far you’ve traveled since you last set the trip odometer back to zero. For informationon resetting this button, see“Control Buttons’’ later in this section. EnglisWetric Display Press theINFO button until ENGLISHMETRIC RESET displays and then press INFO RESET to select. Note that other readings such as temperature, fueland trip odometer also goback and forth between English and metric. 2-59 Vehicle Speed Limiter This feature prevents your vehicle from exceeding speeds that the tires are not rated for. When this happens, the engine’s fuel supply is shut off. When the vehicle speed slows, the fuel supply will come on again. I NOTICE: ~~ Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red areaor engine damage may occur. Tachometer This gage indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). 2-60 Engine Speed Limiter This feature preventsthe engine from operating at too many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine’s rpm are critically high, the fuel supply to the engine is shut off. When the engine speed slows, the fuel supply will come on again. This helps prevent damage to the engine. Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators This part describes thewarning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also saveyou or others from injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens. Gages can indicatewhen there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there‘s a problem with your vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, orwhen one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the sectionthat tells you what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can becostly -- and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help. Your vehicle alsohas a Driver Information Centerthat works along with the warning lights and gages. See “Driver Information Center” later in this section. Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will come on for about eight secondsto remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’ssafety belt is already buckled. The safety belt lightwill also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds, then it will flash for about 70 seconds. If the driver’s beltis already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the lightwill come on. 2-61 Air Bag Readiness Light There is an air bag readiness lighton the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module, For more information on the air bag system, see “Air Bag” in the Index. AIR BAG This light will come on when you start your engine, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready. If the airbag readiness light stayson after you start the engine or comes on when you are driving, your airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there isa problem. Charging System Indicator Light When you turn the key to RUN, this light will come on briefly to show that the generator and battery charging systems are working. If this light stayson, you need service and you should take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save your battery until you get there, turn off all accessories. Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. If the warning light comes on, there isa brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. BRAKE ~ I This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem. c If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully.You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is sti1.l on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See“Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.) 1A CAUTION: Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning lighton can lead to anaccident. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. Parking Brake Indicator Light PARK BRAKE This lightcomes on when the parking brake is set, and it will stay on if the parking brake does not fully release. If you try to drive with the parking brake set, this light will remain on. This light should also come on briefly as you start the vehicle. If it doesn’t, have the light fixed so it will be ready to remind you if the parking brake has not fully released. For more information on how to release the parking brake, see “Parking Brake” earlier in this section. 2-63 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ANT’LOCK With the anti-lock brake system, the light(s) will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds, That’s normal. (e) If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or. if the light comes on when you’re driving, stopas soon as possible and turn the ignition off.Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you’re driving,your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section. The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. 2-64 Traction Control System Warning Light TRACTION CONTROL This warning light should come on briefly as you start the engine. If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere’s a problem. If it stays on, orcomes on when you’re driving, there may be a problem with your traction control system and your vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. The traction control system warning light may come on for the following reasons: 0 If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically related to traction control, thetraction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on. If the traction control system is affected by an engine-related problem, the system will turn off and the warning light will come on. If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light - n This light tellsyou that the engine has overheated. You should stop your vehicle and turn the engine off as soon as possible. A warning chime should alsosound if this light comes on. As a check, the lightshould come on for a few seconds when you start your engine. In the section “Problems on the Road,” this manual explains what to do. See “Engine Overheating’‘ in the Index. Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the red area, the engine is too hot. That reading means the same thing as the warning light -- the engine coolanthas overheated. In the section “Problems on the Road,” this manual explains what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index. 2-65 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (Service Engine Soon Light) SERVICE ENGINE SOON Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems. This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on and a chime will sound to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technicianin correctly diagnosing any malfunction. 2-66 NOTICE: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light not on, after a while, your emission controls may work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine maynot run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty. This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired. This light will also come on duringa malfunction in one of two ways: 0 Light Flashing-- A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualifiedservice center diagnosis and service may be required. 0 Light On Steady -- An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required. If the LightIs Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle: 0 0 0 Reducing vehicle speed. Avoiding hard accelerations. Avoiding steep uphill grades. If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. If the light stops flashingand remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light continues to flash,when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place topark your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remainson steady, see“If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps,and drive the vehicle toyour dealer or qualified service centerfor service. If the LightIs On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following: Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure tofully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel capwill allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. Did you just drive through a deeppuddle of water? If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips shouldturn the light off. Are you low on fuel? As your engine starts torun out of fuel, your engine may not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of air aresucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should correctthis condition. Make sure to installthe fuel cap properly. It will take a few drivingtrips to turn the light off. Have you recently changed brands of fuel? If so, be sure to fuelyour vehicle with quality fuel (see “Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on. 2-67 If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuelbrand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuelto turn the light off. If none of the above steps havemade the light turn off, have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the propertest equipment and diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problems that may have developed. Oil Pressure Light This light tells you if there could be a problem with your engine oil pressure. When the light cumes on and stays on, it means that oil isn’t flowingthrough your engine properly. You could be low on oil and you might have some other system problem. 1A CAUTION: Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your enginecan become so hot that it catches fire.You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicle serviced. I NOTICE: The lightgoes on when you turn your key to RUN or START. It goes off once you start your engine. That’sa check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t come on, be sure tohave it fixed so it will be there to warn you if something goes wrong. 2-68 Damage toyour engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty. 1 It takes more (or less) gas to fill the tank than the gage said. For example, the gage read 8 GALLONS (30 L), but it took more (or less) than the tank’s Fuel Gage The fuel gage shows approximately how much fuel i s in the tank. It works only when the ignition is in RUN. remaining capacity to fill it. 0 The gage may change when you turn, stop or speed up. Fuel Data Display Here are a few concerns some owners have had about the fuel gage. All of these situations arenormal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage. 0 Everything you need to know about the fuel economy and how far you can travel with your vehicle’s remaining fuel is displayed. Fuel data can be obtained by pressing the INFO button. See “Control Buttons” later in this section. At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads F. 2-69 Driver Information Center (DIC) This display gives you the status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is alsoused to display driver personalization features and warningktatus messages. DIC Control Buttons INFO RESET Pressing this button will reset the MPG AVG, GAL FUEL USED, AVG MPH, TIMER, OIL LIFE LEFT and ENGLISHMETRIC RESET. Pressing INFO RESET when a non-resettable display appears will cause a “recall” mode to occur. When this happens, all Driver Information Center (DIC) warning messages that have been displayed since the ignition key was turned to RUN will redisplay. If no messages were displayed, a MONITORED SYSTEMSOK message will appear. MPG AVG (Reset): Press the INFO button to display the MPG AVG (Average Fuel Economy), then press and hold the INFO RESETbutton until 0.0 MPG AVG is displayed. TRIP RESET By using this button, you can tell how far you’vegone since you last set the TRIP RESET back to zero. To reset, press and hold the button until zeros appear. If your vehicle is domestic, the trip odometer will return to zero after 999.9 miles (1 609 km). If your vehicle is Canadian, the trip odometer will return to zero after 1 999.9 km (1,242 miles). GAL FUEL USED (Reset): Press the INFO button to display the GAL FUEL USED on the Driver Information Center (DIC), then press and hold the INFO RESET button until 0.0 GAL FUEL USED is displayed. AVG MPH (Reset): Press the INFObutton to display the AVG MPH (Average Speed), then press and hold the INFO RESETbutton until 0.0 AVG MPH is displayed. TIMER: This feature is likea stopwatch, in that you can clock the time it takes to get from one point to another. 2-70 To operate, press the INFO button to display TIMER. Each of the fields for the hours,minutes and seconds are two numeric digits. Once TIMER OFF 0O:OO:OO is displayed, press the INFO RESET button to startthe timing feature. Press the INFO RESET button again to stopit. If you will be starting and stopping your vehicle -- during a trip for instance -- the TIMER feature will automatically start timing where it left off when you last stopped. To reset it, press and hold the INFO RESET button untilthe display reads TIMER 0O:OO:OO.Press the INFO button to exit fromthe TIMER function. OIL LIFE LEFT (Reset): Press the INFO button to display the OIL LIFE LEFT, then press and hold the INFO RESET buttonuntil 100% OIL LIFE LEFTis displayed. (This onlyneeds to be reset after you have had the oil changed.) ENGLISHAWETRIC (Reset): Press the INFObutton to display ENGLISWMETRICRESET, then press the INFO RESET button to select. The display will change from English (miles) to metric (kilometers). INFO: Pressing this button repeatedly will display the RANGE, MPG AVG, MPG INST, GAL FUELUSED, MPH, AVG MPH, TIMER, BATTERY VOLTS, COOLANT TEMP, OIL LIFE LEFTand ENGLISWMETRIC RESET. FUEL DOOR: Press this button to open the fuel door. (This featurewill work only when the shift lever is in PARK (P) regardless of whether or not the vehicle is running.) TRUNK: Press this button to open the trunk. (This feature will work only when the shift lever is in PARK (P) regardlessof whether or not the vehicle is running.) DIC Messages These messages will appear if there is a problem sensed in one of your vehicle’s systems. Vehicles that are first sold in Canada will have a number after each message. This number helps to identify the message which is only displayed in English. - APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT 46: This message will appear if your vehicle is in PARK (P) for about 15 seconds and the brake is not pressed. To remove this message from the Driver Information Center (DIC) display, hold the OFF and the blue (cooler) buttons on the digital cluster controlpanel for about five seconds. On the analog climate controlpanel, press the OFF button (next tothe MODE button) and the down arrow on the PASS TEMP button for about five seconds.Hold the same two buttons to display the message again. 2-71 - BATTERY NOT CHARGING 7: This message will If this message appearsand stays on while driving or appear if the battery is not being charged. Have the electrical system checked by your dealership at your earliest convenience. after startingyour vehicle, have it checked immediately to determine the cause of this problem.To help the generator recharge thebattery quickly, you can reduce the load on the electrical system by turning off the accessories. You can monitor battery voltage on the Driver Information Center(DIC) by pressing the INFO button. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts. - BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH 8: This message shows that the electrical charging system is overcharging (more than 16 volts). To avoid being stranded, have the electrical system checked by your dealership. You can reduce the charging overload by using the accessories. Turn on the lamps and radio, set the climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on HI, and turn the rear window defogger on. You can monitor battery voltage on the Driver Information Center (DIC) by pressing the INFO button. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts when the engine is running. - BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW 6: This message will appear when the electrical system is charging less than 10 volts orif the battery has been drained. If this message appears immediately after starting, it is possible that the generatorcan still recharge the battery. The battery should recharge and may take afew hours to do so. Consider using an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning home or to a final destination. (Be sure to follow themanufacturer’s instructions when using a battery charger.) 2-72 BRAKE VACUUM PROBLEM -108: The circuit in the brake booster vacuum has shorted oris loose when this message appears.Your vehicle may lose power brakes but you will still have the use of manual brakes. The power brakes will not be affected if the problem is caused by a failedsensor. Have your vehicle serviced immediately at your dealership. - CHANGE ENGINE OIL 82: This means that the life of the engine oilhas expired and it should be changed within 200 miles (322 km). See “Engine Oil” and “Filter Recommendations” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet. After an oil change, the Oil Life Indicator must be reset. See “Oil Life Indicator” in the Index on how to reset it. - CHANGE TRANS FLUID 47: This message will appear when it is time to replacethe transaxle fluid. See the Maintenance Schedule booklet forthe proper fluid and change intervals. - CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL 37: This message will display if the ignition is in RUN to inform the driver that the brake fluid level islow. Check the brake reservoir level and add fluid as needed.Have the brake system serviced by a technician as soon as possible. If the brake warning light is on, follow the directions in that part. - CHECK COOLANT LEVEL 2: This message will appear when there is a low level of engine coolant. Have the cooling system servicedby a technician as soon as possible. - CHECK FUEL GAUGE 39: This message will appear when the fuel supply is lessthan 4 gallons ( 15.2 L) and the display is turned off (digital clusters only). A single chime will also sound when this message is displayed. - CHECK GAS CAP 61: This message will appear if the gas cap has not been fully tightened. You should recheck your gas cap to ensure that it’s fully tightened. CHECK OIL LEVEL 36: For correct operationof the low oil sensing system, yourvehicle should be on a level surface. A false CHECK OIL LEVEL message may appear if the vehicle is parked on grades. Theoil level sensing system does not check for actual oillevel if the engine hasbeen off for a shortperiod of time, and the oil levelis never sensed while the engine is running. - If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears and your vehicle has been parked on level ground with the engine off for at least 30 minutes, the oil level should be checked by observing the oil dipstick. Prior to checking the oil level, be sure the engine has been off for five minutes and your vehicle is on a level surface. Then check the dipstick and add oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index. - CHECK WASHER FLUID 25: This message will appear for severalseconds indicating that you need washer solvent. - CRUISE ENGAGED 43: This message will appear for a few secondswhen you select a speed at which to cruise. DOOR AJAR - 141: A door other than the driver’s is open or ajar when this message appears. The vehicle’s engine must be running and the transaxle not in PARK (P) for this message to display. A chime will also sound when the vehicle’s speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). - DRIVER DOOR AJAR 140: This message will display when the vehicle is being shifted out of PARK (P) with the engine running tosignal that the driver’s door is open or ajar. A chime will also sound when the vehicle’s speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). - ENGINE COOLANT HOT-IDLE ENGINE 44: This message will appear when the engine coolant temperature is over 248 “F ( 126”C). To avoid added strain on a hot engine, turn off the climate control system. Stopand allow your vehicle to idle until it cools down or the message is removed. If it does not cool down, turn off the engine and have it serviced before driving itagain. Severe enginedamage can result from an overheated engine. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index. - - ENGINE HOT AC OFF 16: This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air conditioning compressor is automatically turned off so that air conditioned airis not delivered. If the coolant temperature returns to normal,you must select AC to return to a normal A/C compressor operation. If this message continuesto appear, have the system repaired as soon as possible to avoid compressor damage. ENGINE MISFIRE EASE OFF GAS PEDAL 114: An engine misfire has occurred. You’11 need to ease off the gas pedal. - 2-74 -- - - ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE 42: This message will appear when the engine has overheated. Stopand turn the engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index. A multiple chime will also sound when this message is displayed. - ENGINE POWER REDUCED 41: This message informs you that your vehicle is reducing engine power because the transaxle is being placed in gear under conditions that may cause damage to the vehicle powertrain or vehicle acceleration. - FUEL LEVEL LOW 11: This message serves as a warning that the fuel level in the tank is critically low. Stop for fuel soon. - HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED 23: If it’s dark enough outside and the twilight sentinel control is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). This message informs the driver that turning on the exteriorlamps is recommended even though the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are still illuminated (it’s become dark enough outside torequire the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps). - ICE POSSIBLE 13: This message appears when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions. - LOW REFRIG A/C OFF 12: This message means that the air conditioningsystem detects a refrigerant level that is low enough to cause damageto the air conditioning compressor.To avoid damage, the air conditioning compressor automaticallyturns off and the electronic climate controlsystem will automatically switch from AUTO to ECON and remain there. Have the air conditioning system serviced if this message appears. MONITORED SYSTEMSOK 1: This message only appears in the “recall” mode by pressing the RESET button. It lets you know that no other messages are stored or currently active. - - OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE 35: If this message appears while the engine is running, stop the engine and do not operate ituntil the cause of low oil pressure is corrected. Severe damage to the engine can result. A multiple chime will also sound when this message is displayed. OPTIONS NOT SET - 99: This message will display if a faulthas occurred in your vehicle’s memory. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealership. - PROGRAM PASS KEY 31: This warning message displays when the PASS-Key I1 pellet information has not been programmed into your vehicle. See your dealership for service. - PHONE NOT PRESENT 126: This message will appear when the steering wheel controls forthe optional phone system are activatedbut the phone is not plugged into the vehicle. Make sure your phone is plugged in. If your phone appears to be connected, see your dealership for service. - REMOVE KEY 70: This message will appear when the Personalized Automotive Security System (PASS-Key 11) is unable to read the pellet on the ignition key or an improper key pellet has been inserted. This messageusually appears followingthe display of STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY. The instrument panel clusterwill then run a timer and change the messages to WAIT 3 MINUTES, WAIT 2 MINUTES, WAIT 1 MINUTE and then START CAR. When the REMOVE KEY message is displayed,remove the ignitionkey. Check the ignition key for damage. If it is damaged, it may need to be replaced. If you see no damage, clean the pellet contacts witha soft clothor napkin before inserting the key back into the ignition. Have your vehicle servicedif the message still appears. 2-75 - SERVICE A/C SYSTEM 14: This message appears when the electronic sensors that controlthe air conditioning and heating systems are no longer working. Have the climate controlsystem serviced if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioningefficiency. - SERVICE AIR BAG 83: There is aproblem with the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (air bag)system when this message appears. Let only a qualified technician work on your vehicle. See your dealership for service at once. - SERVICE BRAKE FLUID SWITCH 37: A defect in the brake fluid detection circuit causesthis message to display if the ignition is in RUN. Have the brake system serviced by a technician as soon as possible. If the brake warning light is on, referto the directions listed in that part. SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM 102: This message will display when a problem with the charging system has been detected. Have your vehicle serviced at your dealership. SERVICE ELECTRICSYS 106: This message will display if an electricalproblem has occurred within the Powertrain ControlModule (PCM). Have your vehicle serviced by your dealership. - - 2-76 - SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM 101: The PCM has detected a problem within the fuel system when this message appears. Seeyour dealership for service. - SERVICE IDLE CONTROL 107: A problem with the idle control has occurred when this message displays. Drive your vehicle to the dealership for service. - SERVICE RIDESYS 84: This message is displayed to indicatethat the suspension system is not operating properly. To correct this problem, have your vehicle serviced at your dealership. - SERVICE STEERING SYS 127: This message is displayed when a problem has been detected in the Magnasteer variable effort steering system. Service is required. A single chime will also sound when this message is displayed. SERVICE TRANSMISSION 100: If a problem is detected with the transaxle, this message will appear. Have your vehicle checked by your dealership. TM - - SERVICE VEHICLE SOON 3: If a problem is detected with the transaxle, thismessage will appear. Have your vehicle checked by your dealership. - STABILITY SYS ENGAGED 55: You may see the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message on the Driver Information Center. It means that an advanced, computer-controlled system has come on to help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you’re steering. This stabilityenhancement system activates when the computer sensesthat your vehicle isjust starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery spoton the road. When the system is on, you may heara noise or feel a vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal. When the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message is on, you should continue to steerin the direction you want to go. The system is designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult driving situationsby making the most of whatever road conditions will permit. If the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message comes on, you’ll know that something hascaused your vehicle to start to spin, so you should consider slowing down. - SERVICE STABILITYSYS 54: If you ever seethe SERVICE STABILITY SYS message, it means there may be a problem with your stability enhancement system. If you see this message, try to reset the system (stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again).If the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should see your dealer for service. Reduceyour speed and drive accordingly. A single chime will also sound when this message is displayed. - STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY 33: This message will appear when the Personalized Automotive Security System (PASS-Key 11) senses that an improper ignition key is being used to try to start the vehicle. Check the ignitionkey for damage. If it is damaged, it may need to be replaced. If you see no damage, clean the pellet contacts with a soft clothor napkin. Remove the ignition key and wait forthe Driver Information Center (DIC) to displayWAIT 3 MINUTES. The instrument panel cluster will then run a timer and change the messages to WAIT 2 MINUTES, WAIT 1 MINUTE and then START CAR. When the START CAR message is displayed, try again to start the engine. THEFT SYSTEMPROBLEWCAR MAY NOT RESTART 34: This message means there is a problem in the Personalized Automotive Security System (PASS-Key 11). A fault hasbeen detected in the system which means that the PASS-Key I1 system is disabled and is not protecting thevehicle. The vehicle usually restarts, however, you may want to take your vehicle to a proper service center before turningoff the engine. - 2-77 - - TOP SPEED FUEL OFF 111: This message will appear when the PCM senses that the maximum speed for your vehicle has been reached. The speed of your vehicle will decrease severalmph as the fuel supplyis cut off. Thisallows your vehicle to stay in a stable operating range. - TRACTION ENGAGED 91: When your traction control system is limitingwheel spin, the TRACTION ENGAGED message will be displayed. Slipperyroad conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. This message will stay on for a few seconds after the traction control system stops limitingwheel spin. - TRACTION OFF 89: This message will be displayed after the traction control has been turned off. TRACTION READY 90: This message informs the driver that thetraction control system is available. This occurs when the traction odoff button in the glove box has been returned to an on position (pressing the button once turnsthe traction control systemoff pressing the button again turns the system back on). This message also self cancels after five seconds. - - TRACTION SUSPENDED 56: This message displays when the traction control system has been temporarily shut off because your vehicle’s brakes have overheated. Thismessage does not indicate a problem with your vehicle’s traction control system. After a few minutes, the traction control system will be available again and the TRACTION READY message will appear. - TRANS FLUID RESET 48: With the engine not running and the ignition on, press and hold the OFF and rear defog buttons until the TRANS FLUID RESET message appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) (between five and 20 seconds). - TRANS HOT IDLE ENG 112: This message indicates that the trans’axle fluid in your vehicle is too hot. Stop and allow your vehicle to idle until it cools down or until this message is removed. TRUNK OPEN - 24: This message indicates that the trunk is open when your vehicle’s ignition isin RUN. - TURN SIGNAL ON 20: This message is a reminder, after driving about 1 mile (1.6 km/h), that you have the turn signal on. A multiple chime will also sound when this message is displayed. VEHICLE OVERSPEED- 52: A failure in the suspension control systemhas occurred when this message appears. ThePCM determines the speed your vehicle is limited to. Have your vehicle serviced if this message appears. Memory Seat and Mirrors 6 VEHICLE SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (KM/H) 113: A failure in the suspension control system has occurred when this message appears. The PCM determines the speed your vehicle is limited to. Have your vehicle servicedif this message appears. - - To begin progranming, adjust the driver’s seat (including lumbar adjustments) and both outside mirrors to a comfortable position and then press the SET button. Within five seconds, press button “ 1 .” Programmable, Memory and Personalization Features (If Equipped) :4 ’ Your vehicle may be equipped with the following features that can be individually programmed, memorized or personalized for up to two drivers.For a brief description of each feature (except for climate control and radio personalization), seeeach feature in the Index. A second mirror and seating position may be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button “2” instead of button 1. Note that each time a memory button is pressed, a single beep will sound through the left front speaker. If your vehicle isin PARK (PI, you can recall mirror and seating positions by briefly pressing button 1 or 2. This will adjust the seat and mirrors to where you have previously programmed them.If you have accidentally pressed one of the memory recall buttons and want tostop seat or mirror movement, pressone of the manual seat or mirror control buttons. This cancels a memory recall. 2-79 You can also recall a seat and mirror position if your vehicle is not in PARK (P). Press and hold either the 1 or 2 button until seat and mirror movement is complete. Releasing the buttons will stop adjustment. DRIVR UNLOCK INPARK: All doors automatically lock when shifted outof PARK (P). Only the driver’s door automatically unlocks when shifted into PARK (P). DRIVR UNLOCK IN KEY OFF: All doors The EXIT button can be programmed to allow easy exit for up to two drivers. Adjust the seat to a comfortable “exit” position and then press the SET button followed by the EXIT button. While your vehicle is in PARK (P), briefly press the EXIT button torecall your programmed exit position. automatically lock when shifted out of PARK (P). Only the driver’s door automatically unlocks when the ignition key is turned to OFF. Programmable AutomaticDoor Locks Your vehicle’s ignition must be in RUN. To begin programming, press and hold the INFO and INFO RESET buttons at the same time to display the following prompts. DOORS LOCKIN GEAR: All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK (P). No automatic door unlock. DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK:All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK (P) and unlock when shifting intoPARK (P). 2-80 DOORS UNLOCK KEY OFF: All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK (P). All doors automaticallyunlock when the ignition key is turned to OFF. A “yes” or “no” response must be made after each prompt is displayed in order to continueon to the next prompt or personalization feature. Theyes and no buttons are displayed in amber on the vehicle’s digital control panel. Press the TRIP RESET button to choose yes, press the INFO RESET button to choose no or press the INFO button to “skip” to the next personalization feature. FEATURE ON appears when a yes response ismade and FEATURE OFF appears with a no response. If a no response is made after the DOORS LOCK IN GEAR prompt is displayed,FEATURE OFF will appear. The automatic door lockingsystem has been disabled and no other door lock messages will be displayed. LGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK, which is the next available personalization featureto display, will appear next. See “Lock/Unlock Confirmation” in the Index for more information. If a yes response is made after theDOORS LOCK IN GEAR prompt is displayed, FEATURE ON appears. The automatic door lockingsystem is enabled and allows the DRIVR UNLOCK IN PARK prompt to appear. Choosing this prompt advances you to LGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK whereas a no response will display the D W R UNLOCK KEY OFF prompt. If DRIVR UNLOCK KEY OFF is chosen,FEATURE ON appears. You will advance to the LGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK prompt. If you don’t choose this prompt, FEATURE OFF appears as well as the next prompt -- DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK. If this prompt is chosen, FEATURE ON appears. If a no response was made. DOORS UNLOCK KEY OFF will appear. At this point, ayes or no response automatically brings up the LGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK feature. Lock/Unlock Confirmation This personalization feature allowsthe driver to program the parlung lamps to blink when the lock or unlock buttons on theremote keyless entry transmitter are pressed. to program the horn to sound when the lock button is pressed and/or toprogram the exterior lamps to turn on when the unlock button is pressed. Press the TRIP RESET button to answer yes, press the INFO RESET button to indicate no or press the INFObutton to skip to the next personalization feature. To begin programming, your vehicle’s ignition must be in RUN. Press and hold the INFO and INFO RESET buttons at the same time to display the following prompts. LOCKKJNLOCK confirmation is the second feature toappear:To skip past the first personalization feature, press the Information (INFO) button. LGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK: Parking lamps blink twice when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitteris pressed. LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK: Parking lamps blink once when the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed. HORN SOUNDS AT LOCK: Horn sounds when the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed. 2-81 EXT LIGHTS AT UNLOCK: Exterior lamps (parking lamps, taillamps, sidemarker lamps,license plate lamps, low-beam headlamps, etc.) turn on when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed and it is dark outside. These lamps stay on for about 20 seconds or until the key is turned OFF. The prompts listed here appear in the same order as displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). FEATURE ON appears when a yes response is made and FEATURE OFF appears with a no response. To skip to the next personalization feature (REMOTE RECALL MEMORY), press the INFO button. Remote Recall Memory (If Equipped with Memory Personalization) Memory settings that have been previously programmed (climate control settings, radio preset settings, exterior lighting choices, remote confirmation choicesand programmable automatic door lock choices)can be recalled by using the remote keyless entry transmitter or by placing the key in your vehicle’s ignition. 2-82 Before you begin programming, make sure that your vehicle’s ignition is in RUN. To begin programming, press the INFO and INFO RESET buttons at the same time for about two seconds. As mentioned, remote recall memory is the third feature to appear. To skip past the first two personalization features, press the INFO button. When REMOTE RECALLMEMORY appears, the driver is able to recall memory settings when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed. Press the TRIP RESET button to select or press the INFO RESET button to answer no and to continue on to the next prompt. FEATURE ON displays when a yes responseis made. If a no response was made, the KEY IN RECALL MEMORY prompt will’show next. This choice recalls memory settings when the key is placed in your vehicle’s ignition. FEATURE ON displays fora yes response, and FEATURE OFF for a no response. A yes or no response is required. Curb View Assist Mirror (If Equipped with Memory) If your vehicle has this personalization feature, MIRROR TILT IN REV will be the fourth personalization prompt to display on the Driver Information Center(DIC). To program your vehicle, press the INFO and INFO RESET buttons at the same time forabout two seconds. When MIRROR TILT IN REV appears?a yes or no response is needed.Press the TRIP RESET button to answer yes or the INFO RESET button to answer no. FEATURE ON displays when a yes response is made and FEATURE OFF shows after a no response. Tf Press the TRiP RESET button to answer yes or press the INFO RESET button to indicate a no response. FEATURE ON appears when a yes response is made and FEATURE OFF shows when a no response is made. Since this is the last personalization feature available. a yes or no response will end out of the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. Once the battery guard has been programmed, your vehicle will enter the storage mode about 20 minutes after the ignition key has been turned o f f . you do not want this feature, press the INFO button to skip to the next personalization feature which is STORAGE MODE. Your vehicle will stay in the storagemode until the ignition key is turned out of LOCK. The system will "wake-up" when the door key is inserted into the door, however, your vehicle will remain in the storage mode. The ignition must be out of LOCK before the battery guard is disabled. Storage Mode Personalization Home and Away Feature Before you begin programming, make sure that your vehicle's ignition is in RUN. To begin programming, press the INFO and INFO RESET buttons at the same time for about two seconds. The first message to appear is DOORS LOCK IN GEAR. Press theINFO button after this prompt is displayed until STORAGE MODE prompt appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC). To program. hold two radio preset buttons at the same time until HOME PWSETS DRVR 1 ( DRVR 2) appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. At this time, you are able to input your desired radio stations. Holding the same two radiopreset buttons again will display AWAY PRESETS DRVR 1 (or DRVR 2 ) . Radio stations that are out of your normal operating range can be input at this time. Climate Control Personalization With this feature, your vehicle will recall the latest climate control settingsas adjusted the last time your vehicle was operated. This feature allowstwo different drivers to store and recall their own climate control settings. The settings recalledby the climate control system are determined by which remote keyless entry transmitter (“1” or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle. The number on the back of the remote keyless entry transmitter correspondsto driver 1 or to driver 2. After the unlock button is pressed onthe remote keyless entry transmitter or the ignition key is placed in the ignition, the climate control settings will automatically adjust to where they were last set. The settings can also be changed by briefly pressing the memory seat buttons 1 or 2 located on the driver’s door. Radio Personalization With this feature, your vehicle will recall the latest radio settings as adjusted the last time your vehicle was operated. This feature allows two different drivers to store and recall their own radio settingsfor AM and FM presets, last tuned station, volume, tone and audio source (radio, cassette or CD). The settings recalled by 2-84 the radio are determined by which remote keyless entry transmitter (1 or 2 ) was used to enter the vehicle. The number on the back of the remote keyless entry transmitter corresponds to driver 1 or to driver 2. After the unlock button is pressed on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the ignition is in RUN, the radio settings will automatically adjust to where they were last set by the identified driver. The settings can also be changed by briefly pressing the memory seat buttons 1 or 2 located on the driver’s door. The new settings will be saved for the driver. Continuous Variable -- Road Sensing Suspension (CV-RSS) (ETC Only) The CV-RSS automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle. Automatic ride control is achieved through a computer used to control and monitor the suspension system. The controller receives input from various sensors to determine the proper system response. If the controller detects a problem within the system, the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a SERVICE RIDE CONTROL message. If this message appears, have your vehicle serviced at your dealership. Oil Life Indicator This feature lets you know when to change the engine oil. It’sbased on the engine oil temperatures and your driving patterns. To see the display, press the INFO button several times until XX OIL LIFE LEFT appears. If you see 99% OIL LIFE LEFT, 99 percent of your current oil life remains. The Driver Information Center(DIC) may display a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message. Always keep a written record of the mileage and date when you changed your oil. For more information, see the Maintenance Schedule booklet. If you see CHANGE ENGINE OIL, it means that you have less than 10 percent of the oil life left and you should consider changing your engine oil. The system should indicate changing the oil between 3,000 miles (5 000 kmj and 7,500 miles (1 2 500 km). It may indicate changing the oil before 3.000 miles ( 5 000 km) depending on your driving habits. If the vehicle has been driven 7.500 miles ( 1 2 500 km). it will indicate to change the oil. If you drive in a dusty area, you should change your oil every 3.000 miles ( 5 000 km)or three months (whichever comes first) unless the display indicateschanging it sooner. The system doesn’t check hmt*much oil you have, so you’ll still have to check for that.To see how, see “Engine Oil’’ in the Index. When the oil is changed. you‘ll need to reset the system. To reset, display the Oil Life Indicator by pressing the INFO button. Then press and hold the INFO RESET button until the display shows 100% OIL LIFE LEFT. 2-85 b NOTES -, Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure to read about the particular systems suppliedwith your vehicle. 3-2 3-2 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-8 3-9 3-9 3-9 3-9 3- 10 3-13 3-1 8 Comfort Controls Climate Control Panel Electronic Solar Sensor Air Conditioning Heating Ventilation System Defrosting Rear Window Defogger HVAC Steering Wheel Controls Climate Control Personalization (If Equipped) Audio Systems Setting the Clock AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player (If Equipped) AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player with Radio Data Systems (RDS) and Digital Signal Processing (DPS) ( I f Equipped) 3-27 3-28 3-3 1 3-32 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-36 3-37 Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections Trunk Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped) CD Adapter Kits Radio Personalization (If Equipped) Theft-Deterrent Feature Audio Steering Wheel Controls Understanding Radio Reception Tips About Your Audio System Care of Your Cassette Tape Player Care of Your Compact Discs Care of Your Compact Disc Player Power Antenna Mast Care Comfort Controls This section tells you how to make your air system work for you. Your Electronic Climate Control (ECC) system uses ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant. With the ECC system, you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a flow-throughventilation system described later in this section. Climate Control Panel Fan Button The button with the fan symbol adjusts the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase fanspeed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed. 3-2 Driver’s Side TemperatureKnob The TEMP/AUTOknob adjusts the air temperature coming through the system. Turn the TEMPIAUTO knob to the right to increase the temperature and to the left to decrease the temperature. Press the TEMP/AUTO knob to put the system in the automatic mode. Passenger’s Side Temperature Button With this dual-zone feature,the right front passenger can control the temperature of air forhisher own zone. The passengercan select a fourdegree warmer or cooler temperature from the driver’s setting. To turn the system on, press the PASSREMP button. Press the up arrow to increase the temperature and press the down arrow to decrease the climate sating. Pressing the OFF button will turn off the dual-zone function. Outside Temperature Display The outside temperature is always displayed when your vehicle is running.You can change it from Fahrenheit to Celsius by pressing the INFO button (above the radio) until ENGLISHMETRIC RESET displays. Once displayed, pressthe INFO RESET button to select. The outside temperature sensoris located near the front grille. The sensorcan be affected by road or engine heat during idling, slow driving or when the engine is first started after a short trip. In order to ensure proper automatic climate control operation,the outside air temperature display may not update as quickly as expected. This is to allow the air surrounding the outside temperature sensor tobe as close to the actual outside conditions as possible. This is determined by how much time has elapsed sincethe vehicle has been turned off and by vehicle speed. Mode Button Press this button to deliver air through the floor, middle or windshield outlets.The system will stay in the selected mode until the MODE button is pushed again. Press the up or down arrow to cycle through the available modes. Automatic Operation When the system is set for automatic operation, sensors will control the air deliverymode. Air will come from the floor, middle or windshield outlets. The fanspeed will vary as the system maintains the selected temperature setting. Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensor located in the middle of the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensoris used by the automatic system to regulate temperature. To find your comfort zone, start withthe 75°F (24°C) setting and allow about 30 minutes for the system to regulate. Turn the TEMP/AUTO knob to adjustthe temperature if necessary. If you choose 60°F ( 16"C), the system will remain at that maximum cooling setting and will not regulate fan speed.If you choose the temperature of 90°F (32"C),the system will remain at that maximum heating setting and will not regulate fan speed. Choosing either maximum settingwill not cause the system to heat or coolany faster. With the automatic setting,the air conditioning compressor automatically cycles when needed to cool the air. In cold weather, when the system senses the need for heat, the airflow will be directed out the floor outlets. As the interior temperatureapproaches a desired setting, the blower speed will decrease. To maintain interior comfort, the airflow may move to the instrument panel air outlets and floor outlets (bi-level mode).On bright sunny days in cold weather, the airflow may come out of the air conditioning outlets (AC mode) to maintain comfort and prevent stuffiness. 3-3 If your vehicle is sitting out on a hot day and you have it set on AUTO, the air will first flow out the floor air outlets for a few seconds. That is normal. This is to expel hot air from the air outlets.As the air is cooled, the airflow will move through the air conditioning outlets. If you start your vehicle with the fan settingon HI, it will skip the air conditioningpurge. To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available. The length of delay depends on the outside air temperature, engine coolant temperatureor the time since the engine was last started.As the coolant warms up, the blower fan speed will gradually increase and air will flow from the heater outlets, with some aifflow to the windshield to prevent fogging under most normal conditions. If you leave your vehicle, the system will remember the control setting the next time you start your engine, except for recirculation and defrost. Each ignition cycle cancels recirculation, whereas, DEFROST will change to automatic operation when the ignition is shut off and then turned back on. 3-4 Manual Operation You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan speed. A0 /J AC: This setting directs airflow through the middle instrument panel outlets. A0 BI-LEVEL: This setting directs airinto your vehicle in two ways. Cool air is directed to the upper portion of your body through the four instrument panel outlets while warmed air is directed to the floor. l# w. HEATER/DEFROST: This setting directs air to 'fl the floor outlets and toward the windshield. 0 HEATER: This'setting directs warmed air through the floor outlets. Some warm air is diverted to the windshield to minimize fogging. DEFROST Press this button to quickly remove fog or frostfrom the windshield. This setting sends most of the airflow to the windshield with only a small amount to the floor outlets. I# % FAN SPEEDS: Press the button with the fan symbol on it until AUTO is displayed on the screen. At this setting, the fanspeed is automatically controlled. If it is cold outside, theblower may not run in the maximum high fan speed right away. The system checks the temperature of the engine coolant to assureit is warm enough to provide heat. When the engine coolant is warm, the controller allows the fanto gradually increase to a higher speed. This prevents cold air from blowing into thepassenger compartment. If you want the blower fan at a high speed, press the up arrow button until you see HI on the display. If you want the fan speed to be automatic,but you like the fanspeed to be higher than the AUTO setting, pressthe fan symbol button until HI AUTOis shown on the display. If you want the blower fan at a low speed, pressthe down arrow button until LO is shown on the display. If you want thefan speed to run lower than theAUTO setting, press the button until LO AUTO is shown on the display. OFF: Press this button to turn the system off. Fresh air will continue to flow through the vehicle, and the system will try to maintain the previouslyset temperature. The outside temperature will show on the display when the system is OFF. AC: Press this button to turn the air conditioningon and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle. In the AUTO mode, the display will show that AC is active,but the air conditioning compressor only operates when the system determines itis needed. RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit the amount of fresh air enteringyour vehicle. This ishelpful when you are trying to cool the air quickly or limit odors entering your vehicle. In the AUTO mode, the system will use recirculation as necessaryto cool the air. Pressing therecirculation button will change the operation to a manual mode and the air will recirculate non-stop. Press this button again to turn off the recirculation feature. If you notice the windows fogging, press the recirculation button to exit the recirculation mode. 3-5 Electronic Solar Sensor Press the AC button or the TEMP/AUTO knob to turn the system on and then select the proper MODE to direct airflow. The system will cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle. Also while in the AUTO mode, the system will use recirculation as necessary to cool the air. You may also need to adjust the interior temperature and the fan speed as needed. When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine speed and power. This is normal because the system is designed to cyclethe compressor on and off to keep the desired temperature. The sensormonitors the sun’s solar radiation and is located on top of the instrument panel near the windshield. The ECC panel uses this information to automatically make the necessary temperature and airflow adjustments to maintain your comfort. Air Conditioning On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot inside airescape. This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed for the air conditionerto work its best. 3-6 Heating Press the MODE buttdn to select heater. Adjust the interior temperatureto a comfortablelevel and if the fan speed needs adjusting, press the up or down arrow. Outside air will be brought in and sent through the floor, air conditioning orbi-level outlets (dependingon the condition). Theheater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it. Ventilation System Your vehicle's flow-through ventilation system supplies outside air intothe vehicle when it is moving. Outside air will also enterthe vehicle when the heater or the air conditioning fan is running. - ...,I .. . , , I . . , .. : . The direction of airflow forthe rear seats can also be adjusted. Movethe fan leverto adjust theblower speed from LO to HI. Move the vent lever to directthe airflow. The front outlets are locatedin the center and at each side of the instrument panel.You can adjust the direction of airflow by moving the center control levers or you can stop the aifflow by moving the lever located on each side of the outlets downward. 3-7 Ventilation Tips 0 Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defrosterwill work far better, reducing the chance of fogging the insideof the windows. 0 When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, adjust the fan to the highest speed for a few moments before driving off. This helps clearthe intake outletsof snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of the windows. 0 Keep the air path under the front seats clearof objects. This helps circulateair throughout your vehicle. Defrosting Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extremely humid or cold conditions. Rear Window Defogger The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass. Press this button to turn on the rear defogger. With it, the rear window and both outside rearview mirrors are heated. The system will automatically shut off after 10 minutes. If further defogging is desired,press the button again. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals across the defogger grid onthe rear window. NOTICE: ~ Press the DEFROST button. If you select DEFROST, adjust the fanspeed by pressing the fan button up or down. If you select DEFROST from AUTO, the system will control the fan speed. Thetemperature also needs to be adjusted by turning the TEMP/AUTO knob. Note that recirculation is not available in the defrost or defog modes. 3-8 ~~~ Don’t usea razor blade or something else sharp on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you or the could cutor damage the warming grid integrated rear window antenna, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. HVAC Steering Wheel Controls Some heatingand cooling controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. Other touch controls operate some audio controls. See “Audio Steering Wheel Controls” later in this section. FAN SPEED: Press the up arrow lever to increase the fan speedand the down arrow lever to decrease fan speed. TEMP: Press the up arrow lever to increase the temperature and the down arrow lever to decrease temperature. Climate Control Personalization (If Equippedj This feature allows both driver’s (driver1 or 2 depending on the number on the back of your remote keyless entry transmitter) to personalize their own climate control settings. For more information, see “Programmable, Memory and Personalization Features”in the Index. Audio Systems Your Cadillac audiosystem has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure.You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all its controls,to be sure you‘re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it. Setting the Clock Press and hold HR or MN until the time display begins to change. Release the button as you get close to the correct time. The time may be set anytime the clock is displayed. There isa two-second delay before the clock goes into time-set mode. 3-9 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player Finding a Station BAND: Press this button to select AM, FMl or FM2 and preset stations. SEEK-TUNE: Press and release this button to seek to the next higher orlower radio station. Pressing and holding this button until a chime sounds puts the radio in a tune mode. In this mode, higher or lower radio stations are advanced to in small increments until the SEEK-TUNE button is released. Tuning stops when you release this button. If you press and hold the SEEK-TUNE button again within five seconds of being in the tune mode, tuning will continue. Waiting longer than fiveseconds places the radio back in the seek mode. Playing the Radio PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system on. Press theknob again to turn the system off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the SCAN: Press this button and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station, stopfor a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press this button again to stop scanning, left to decrease volume. The volume level will appear on the display. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just: DSPL: Press this button to display the station being played. 1. Turn the radio on. 3-10 2. Press BAND to select AM, FMl or FM2. 3. Tune in the desired station. Setting the Tone 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn more than two secondsuntil you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered button for less than two seconds, the station you set will return. the knob to the right to increase and to the left to decrease bass. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. When battery power is removed and later applied, you will not have to reset your radio presets becausethe radio remembe,rs them. PRESET SCAN: Press and hold SCAN for two to three seconds until PRESET SCAN appears on the display to listen to each of your preset stations for afew seconds (factory presets which have not been reprogrammed with your stations will be ignored). The radio will go to the first preset station storedon your pushbuttons, stop for a few seconds,then go on to the next presetstation. Press SCAN again to stop scanning.If a preset station has weak reception, the radio will not stop atthe preset station. TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to the right to increase and to the left to decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy. you may want to decrease the treble. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them. Adjusting the Speakers BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to the right to adjust sound to the right speakers and to the left for the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob to the right to adjust the sound to the front speakers and to the left for the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them. 3-11 Playing a Cassette Tape With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will begin playing as soon as it is inserted.When one side of your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays the other sideof your cassette tape. If you want to insert a cassette tape when the ignition is off, first press EJECT. While the tape is playing,use the VOL, FADE, BAL, BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio. Other controls may have different functions whena tape is inserted. The display will show TAPE with an arrow to indicate which sideof the tape is playing. PLAY will appear on the display temporarily whena tape is playing. The display will then revert back to showingthe time. If an error occurs while trying toplay a cassette tape, it could be that: The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette tape with the open end down and try turning the right hub to the left with a pencil. Flip the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your cassette tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to be sure your player is working properly. The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if your tape is broken. Try a new tape.) 3-12 REV Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The radio will play while the tape reverses and REV will appear on the display. You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another radiostation while in REV mode. Press the left arrow again to return to playing speed. FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another part of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances and FF will appear on the display. You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station while in FF mode. Press the right arrow again to return to playing speed. SEEK-TUNE: Press the right arrow to seek tothe next selection on the tape. Press the left arrow to search for the previous selection'on the tape (REP will appear on the display). Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for SEEK-TUNE to work. The sound will mute while seeking. SCAN: Press this button. SCAN FF will appear on the display until the next selection is found and then SCAN PLAY will appear on the display. Use SCAN to listen to selections for a few seconds. Thetape will go to a selection, stop fora few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this button again to stop scanning. SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tape that is playing. (PLAY shows on the display.) SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. If no cassette tape is in the tape player, CASS appears on the display and then the radio station appears briefly. The display then reverts back to showing the time of day. Press this button again or BAND to switch back to the radio. AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player (If Equipped) A EJECT Press the upward triangle button to remove a tape. The radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing until the PWR button is pressed. Press PWR or turn the ignition key off to stop the cassette tape player. The tape will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped. CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Playing the Radio PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system on. Press the knob again to turn the system off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the left to decrease volume. 3-13 SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Sources include cassette and compact disc. The audio source must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are shown on the display. If a source isbeing used, it will be underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the display. Press this button again or BAND to switch back to the radio. MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Pressit again to turn on the sound. Finding a Station BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2 and preset stations. TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has two positions. Press this button to the firstposition to manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio will continue tuning until this button is released. Press this button to the second position and release to seek to the next higher or lower radio station. SCAN: Press this button for less than two seconds to scan radio stations. The radio will go to a station, stop for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press this button again to stop scanning. 3-14 PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to 18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). Just: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press BAND to select AM, FMl or FM2. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered button for less than two seconds, the station you set will return. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. When battery power is removed and later applied, you will not have to reseryour radio presets because the radio remembers them. PRESET SCAN:Press and hold SCAN for more than two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each of your preset stations for five seconds. The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop for fiveseconds, then go on to the next preset station. PressSCAN again to stop scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the radio will not stop at the preset station. Setting theTone TONE: Press and release this button until the desired tone control (BASS or TREBLE)is found. LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control. press the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select the desired level. Adjusting the Speakers 4 SPEAKER: Press and release this button until the desired BALANCE orFADE control is found. LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or FADE control, press theplus (+) or minus (-1 symbol on this button to select the desired level. Playing a Cassette Tape With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will begin playing as soon as it is inserted. When one side of your cassette tape is doneplaying, auto reverse playsthe other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing until the radio is on. If you want to insert a cassette tape when the ignition is off, first press EJECT. While the tape is playing, use the VOL, TONE. LEVEL. and SPEAKER controls just as you do for the radio. Other controls may have-different functionswhen a tape is inserted. The display will show an underlined tape symbol. TAPE PLAY will appear on the display when a tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side of the tape is playing. If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it could be that: 0 The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette tape with the open end down and try turning the right hub to the left with a pencil. Flip the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily. your cassette tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to be sure your player is working properly. The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if your tape is broken. Try a new tape.) RW: Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The radio will play while the tape rewinds. You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station while in RW mode. Press the left arrow again to return to playing speed. 3-15 FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another part of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances. You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station while in FF mode. Press the right arrow again to return to playing speed. TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two positions. This button works the same, whether it is pressed to the first or second position. Press this button to seek tothe next or previous selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for TUNE-SEEK to work. The sound will mute while seeking. SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few seconds. The tape will go to a selection, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this button again to stop scanning. SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tape that is playing. 3-16 A EJECT Press the upward triangle button to remove a tape. The radio will play. Eject may be activated with the radio off andor the vehicle ignition off. CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player’’ in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for three seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator. Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Auto Cr02 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to the type of cassette tape forclearer sound for Cr02 cassette tapes. Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on and the underlined compact disc symbol appears on the display, the disc will begin playing. Compact discs may be loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing until the radio is on. If you want to insert a disc when the ignition is off, first press EJECT. The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm compact discs. Full-size compact discs and the smaller compact discs are loaded in the same manner. If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot, the disc may not play. If the disc comes out,it could be that: The disc is upside down. 0 It is dirty, scratched or wet. The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.) If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcan’t be corrected, please contact your dealer. R W Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed. FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to another part of the compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed. TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two positions. This button works the same. whether it is pressed to the first or second position. Press this button to seek to the next or previous selection on the compact disc. SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few seconds. The compact disc will go to aselection, stop for afew seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this button again to stop scanning. RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn - off random play. A EJECT Press the upward triangle button to remove a compact disc. The radio will play. Eject be activated with the radio off and/or the vehicle ignition off. 3-17 AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player with Radio Data Systems (RDS) and Digital Signal Processing (DSP) (If Equipped) SOURCE: Press this button to select a source.Source include cassetteand compact disc. The audio source must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are shown on the display. If a source is being used, it will be underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the display. Press this button again or BAND to switch back to the radio. Finding a Station BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1, FM2 or weather, and preset stations. TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has two positions. Press this button to the first position to manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio will continue tuning until this button is released. Press this button to the second position and release to seek to the next higher or lower radio station. Playing the Radio PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system on. Press the knob again to turn the system off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the left to decrease volume. 3-18 SCAN: Press this button for less than two seconds to scan radio stations.The radio will go to a station, stop for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press this button again to stop scanning. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. The RDS PTY mode must be off to use this mode. You can set up to 24 stations (six A M , six FM1, six FM2 and six weather). Just: Using RDS Mode Your audio system is equipped with Radio Data Systems (RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features. When RDS is on, the radio can: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press BAND to select AM, FM 1, FM2 or weather. seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to listen to. 3. Tune in the desired station. seek to stations with traffic announcements. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for more than two seconds.Whenever you press that numbered button for less than two seconds, the station you set will return. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. When battery power is removed and later applied, you will not have to reset your radio presets because the radio remembers them. PRESET SCAN: Press and hold SCAN for more than two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each of your preset stations for five seconds.The radio will go to the first presetstation stored on your pushbuttons, stop for five seconds,then go on to the next preset station. Press SCAN againto stop scanning. If a preset station has weak reception, the radio will not stop at the preset station. 0 receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies, 0 receive and display messages from radio stations and 0 search for a stronger station when a station is too weak for listening. RDS features are only available foruse on FM stations which broadcast RDS information. 0RDS SELECT Press the orange rectangular button to use the alternate RDS functions (RDS, TA, MSG, PTY and < PTY > ) located on the six numbered pushbuttons. RDS SELECT: will appear on the display. The alternate RDS functions are only available when you are using the FM band of your radio. 3-19 RDS (1): With RDS off, press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this button to turn RDS on. The RDS display will turn on. You must have RDS on to use the new RDS functions. The RDS display will also turn on if one of the other RDS function buttons has been pressed on. If you are tuned to a station broadcasting RDS information, the station’s call letters and Program Type (PTY) will replace the station’s frequency on the display. After five seconds, the program type will be replaced on the display by the station’s program type name. The program type and program type name may be the same ordifferent. Press SOURCE torecall the frequency and program type displays. If the radio is tuned to a station that is not broadcasting RDS information, the station’s frequency will remain on the display. While RDS is on, the radio will search for a stronger station in the network when a station gets too weak for listening. Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this button again to turn RDS off. All RDS functions will be turned off. REGION: You can also use the RDS button to access the region function. When an RDS station becomes weak, this function searches for a stronger station within the same network. A network can span a great distance. One network can have stations spread across a country or continent. Each network breaks down into regions. With regions, local news items like weather and traffic 3-20 are available to you. When the region function is on,the radio only searches for stations in the same network and region. You can only use the region function when RDS is already on. Press the RDS SELECT button. Then press and hold the RDS button for two seconds. REGION: ON will appear on the display. While REGION: ON appears on the display, press the RDS button again to turn the region function off. REGION: OFF will appear on the display. The region function can be turned on again by pressing the RDS button. TA (2): Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this button to receive traffic announcements. The radio will turn on the TA display. TP will appear on the display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. You may also receive traffic announcements from stations in the network related to the tuned station. If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a station which does. When the radio findsa station which broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. If no station is found, NONE FOUND will appear on the display. When SEEK or SCAN ispressed with the traffic announcement function on, the radio will only stop at stations which broadcast traffic announcements. While a trafficannouncement plays, the radio uses a special type of volume called TA volume. To increase TA volume, turn the PWRNOL knob to the right. Turn it to the left to decrease volume. TA VOLUME will appear on the display while the volume is being adjusted. When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station or a related network station, you will hear it, even if the volume ismuted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the radio tunes to a related network station for a traffic announcement? it will return to the original station when the announcement is finished. If the cassette tapeor compact disc player was being used, the tape orcompact disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped. Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this button again to turnTA off. MSG (3): When RDS ison, if the current station has a message, MSG will appear on the display. Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this button to see the message. If the whole message does not appear on the display, parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message iscompleted. To see the parts of the message fasterthan every three seconds, press this button again. A new group of words will appear on the display. Once the completemessage has been displayed, MSG will disappear from the display until another new MSG is received. Each message can only be read once. PTY (4): This button is used to turn on and off Program Type (PTY) seeks and scans. Press the RDS SELECT button, followed bythis button. The PTY display will turn on. RDS SELECT. PTY NEWS will appear on the display for three seconds. (The PTY shown will be the last PTY selected.) Pressthe RDS SELECT button, followed by this button again to turn the PTY display off. < PTY > ( 5 ) (6): With RDS on, press the RDS SELECT button, followed by < or > . The F’TY display will turn on, if it is not already on. RDS SELECT: PTY NEWS will appear on the display for three seconds. (The PTY shown will be the lastPTY selected.) Whilethis message is displayed, use < *and > to move up and down the PTY list. If you pause on a PTY for three seconds, PRESET PTY NEWS will appear on the display.W e this message is displayed, you can savethe PTY in a preset by pressing one of the six numbered pushbuttons untilyou hear a beep. Allowthree seconds for the message to disappear if you do not want to save the ITY in a preset. See “Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections” in the Index. When the PTY display is on, press SEEK and SCAN to find radio stations of the PTY you want to listen to. The last PTY selected will be used for seek and scan modes. 3-21 If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE FOUND will appear on the display. If both PTY and TA are on, the radio will search for stations withtraffic announcements and the selected PTY. PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite Program Types (PTYs). These buttons have factory PTY presets. See “Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections” in the Index. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMl and six FM2). Just: 1, Turn PTY on. 2. Press BAND to select E M 1 or FM2. 3. Tune an RDS station with the PTY you desire. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered button for less than two seconds,the PTY you set will return. 5 . Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. When battery power is removed and later applied,you will not have to reset your RDS presets because the radio remembers them. HR or MN: Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by one of these buttonsto display the timefor the current station.STATION TIME IS will be displayed. If a time has not been sent to the radio, NO STATION TIME will be displayed. If you have recently tuned to the station, you may need to wait a minute before the time is available to the radio. To set the clock to the current displayedstation time, press and hold HR or MN until TIME UPDATED is displayed. There is a two second delay before the time is updated. RDS mode does not have to be on to use this function. but you must be tuned to an FM RDS station. ALERT This type of announcement warns of national or local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. Alert announcements will come on even if RDS mode is turned off. ALERT appears on the display when an alert announcement plays. The radio uses TA volume during theseannouncements. To increase volume, turn the PWRNOL knob to the right. Turn it to the left to decrease volume. TA VOLUME will appear on the display while the volume is being adjusted. When an alert announcement comes on the tuned radio station or arelated network station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the radio tunes to a related network station for an alert announcement, it will return to the original station when the announcement is finished. If the cassette tape or compact disc player, play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished. Setting theTone 0 DRIVER SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to give the driverthe best possible sound qualities. DRIVER SEAT can be used at any time for any material. Rear seat passengers in the vehicle may not get the same effect. 0 LIVE: This setting is used to enhance the TONE: Press and release this button until the desired tone control (BASSor TREBLE) is found. LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control. press the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select the desired level. DSP: The Digital Signal Processing (DSP) feature is used to provide a choiceof four differentlistening experiences: TALK, DRIVER SEAT, LIVE and AUDITORIUM. DSP can be used while listening to the radio, the cassettetape player or the CD player. Press this button to turn DSP on. Press and release this button until you reach the desired selection. To turn DSP off, press and hold this button until DSP OFF appears on the display. 0 TALK: This setting is used when listening to non-musical material such as news, talk shows, sports broadcasts and books on tape. TALK makes spoken words sound very clear. stereo effect. 0 0 AUDITORIUM: This setting is used to make the listening space seem larger. LEVEL: Press the plus (+) or minus ( - ) symbol on this button to adjust the amount of effect desired when in DSP mode. Adjusting the Sp.eakers TONE: Press and release this button until the desired BALANCE or FADE control is found. LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or FADE control, press the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select the desired level. 3-23 Playing a Cassette Tape With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will begin playing as soon as it is inserted. When one side of your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverseplays the other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing until the radio ison. If you want to insert a cassette tape when the ignition is off, first press EJECT. While the tape is playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVEL and DSP controls just as you do for the radio. Other controls may have different functionswhen a tape is inserted. The display will show an underlined tape symbol. TAPE PLAY will appear on the display when a tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side of the tape is playing. 3-24 If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it could be that: The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette tape with the open end down and try turning the right hub to the left with a pencil. Flip the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your cassette tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to be sure your player is working properly. The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if your tape is broken. Try a new tape.) RW: Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The radio will play while the tape rewinds. You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to anotherradio station while in RW mode. Press the left arrow again to return to playing speed. FF: Press the rightarrow to fast forward to another part of the tape. The radiowill play while the tape advances. You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station whilein FF mode. Press the right arrow again to return to playing speed. TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two positions. This button works the same, whether it is pressed to the first or second position. Press this button to seek to the nextor previous selection on the tape. Your tape must haveat least three seconds of silence between each selection for TUNE-SEEK to work. The sound will mutewhile seeking. SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for afew seconds. The tape will go to a selection. stop for few a seconds, then go on to the next selection. Pressthis button again to stop scanning. SIDE: Press this button to changethe side of the tape that is playing. /1\ EJECT Press the upward triangle button to remove a tape. The radiowill play. Eject may be activated with the radio off and/or the vehicle ignition off. CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for threeseconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator. Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Auto Cr02 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to the type of cassette tape for clearersound for Cr02 cassette tapes. 3-25 Playing a Compact Disc Insert a disc partway into the slot,label side up. The player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on and the underlined compact disc symbol appears on the display, the disc will begin playing. Compact discs may be loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing until the radio is on. If you want to insert a disc when the ignition is off, firstpress EJECT. The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm compact discs. Full-size compact discsand the smaller compact discs are loaded in the same manner. If you’re drivingon a very rough road or if it’s very hot, the disc may not play. If the disc comes out, it could be that: The disc is upside down. It is dirty, scratched or wet. The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.) If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, please contact yourdealer. 3-26 RW: Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed, FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to another part of the compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed. TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two positions. This button works the same, whether it is pressed to the first or second position. Press this button to seek to the next or previous selection on the compact disc. SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for few a seconds. Thecompact disc will go to a selection, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this button again to stop scanning. RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn off random play. A EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to remove a compact disc. The radiowill play. Eject may be activated with the radio off and/or the vehicle ignition off. Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections PTY List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description Adlt Hit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adult Hits Any Any . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classical Classic1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cls Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classical Rock College . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . College Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Country Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Jazz Jazz, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language News News . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nostalga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nostalgia Oldies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oldies Persnlty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personality Public Public . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R & B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rhythm and Blues Re1 Musc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Religious Music Re1 Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Religious Talk PTY List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description Rock Music Rock M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft . . . . . . . . . + , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Soft Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Rock sports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sports Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Talk Top40 Top40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather Factory PTY Presets Preset Preset 1 I FMl I FM2 Adult Hits Jazz Preset 2 Classical Oldies Preset 3 News Religious Music Preset 4 Public Soft Rock Preset 5 Rock R&B Preset 6 Country Top 40 ~ 3-27 Trunk Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped) With the compact disc changer,you can play up to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discsmay be played using the trays supplied in the magazine. The smaller discs(8 cm) can be played only with specially designed trays. NOTICE: Objects in the trunk which may shift or slide CD changer. during driving could damage your Protect your CD changer by using the convenience net whenever possible. Place large objects in the trunk appropriatelyso that they will not come into contactwith the CD changer. 3-28 A i L k You must first load the magazine with discs beforeyou can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds one disc. Pressthe button on the back of the magazine and pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label sidedown. If you load a disc label side up, the disc will not play and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back into the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loadingup to 12 discs in the magazine. , "i * A d Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on top of the magazine. Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. When the door is closed, the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine. This will continue for up to one and a half minutes, depending on the number of discs loaded. To eject the magazine from the player. slide the CD changer door all the way open. The magazine will automatically eject.Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer. 3-29 Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer, the CDchanger symbol will appear on the radio display.If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play. When a CD begins playing, a discand track number will be displayed. Thedisc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine. All of the CD functions are controlledby the radio buttons, except for ejecting the CD magazine. PUSHBUTTONS: Press buttons onethrough six to select compact discs one through six. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep soundsto select compact discs 7 through 12. These pushbuttons represent the order of the discsloaded in the changer. DSPL: Press and hold this button to see the track elapsed time (availableon the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player only). REV/RW Press and hold this button to reverse quickly through a track selection. FF: Press and hold this button to advance quickly through a track selection. If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player, use SEEK-TUNE. Forall other audio systems, use TUNE-SEEK. SEEK-TUNE: Press the right arrow to seek to the next selection. Press the left arrow to search forthe previous track selection. The sound will mute while seeking. TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two positions. Thisbutton works the same, whether it is pressed to the first orsecond position. Press this button to seek to thenext or previous selection on the compact disc. SCAN: Press this button. You will hear the first few seconds for the first track on each disc. Pressthis button again to stop scanning. (This button is available on the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Playeronly.) TRACK SCAN: Press SCAN for lessthan two seconds. You will hear the first-few seconds of each track on a disc. Press SCAN again to stop TRACK SCAN. The CD will mute while scanning and SCAN will appear on the display. (This function is not available on the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player.) DISC SCAN: When you press SCAN formore than two seconds, you will hear the first few seconds of the first track on each disc. Press SCAN again to stop DISC SCAN. The CD will mute while scanningand SCAN will appear on the display. (This functionis not available on the AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player.) RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random. Compact Disc Changer Errors rather than sequential,order. RANDOM will appear on the display. Press TUNE-SEEK while RDM is on the display torandomly seek through discs and tracks. Press RDM again to turn off random play. (This button is not available on the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player.) CD CHANGER ERROR could be displayed for the following: 0 The road is too rough. The disc should play when the road is smoother. 0 The disc is dirty. scratched, wet or loaded label side up. 0 The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. SIDE: Press this button to select the next disc in the changer. If your vehicle isequipped with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape P1aye.r. CD and the disc number will appear on the displayeach time you press this button. If your vehicle is equipped with any other audio system, DISC LOADINGwill appear on the display and the disc number on the radio display will go to that of the next availableCD each time you press this button. SOURCE: Press this button to select a source.The audio source must be loaded to play. If none of the audio sources are loaded,NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the display. Press this button again or BAND to switch back to the radio. (CD will be displayed for a few seconds instead on the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player, then the radio will play.) CD CHANGER DOOR OPEN is displayed when the CD changer door is left open. (CHEK DOOR will be displayed instead on the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player.) Completely close the changer door to restore normal operation. If any error occursrepeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, please contact your dealer. EJECT Slide theCD changer door all the way open and the disc holderwill automatically eject. 3-31 CD Adapter Kits It is possibleto use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating thebypass feature on your tape player. To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps: 0 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. Turn the radio off. Press and hold the SOURCE button for two seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash three times, indicating the feature isactive. 0 Insert the adapter. This override routinewill remain active until EJECT is pressed. Radio Personalization(If Equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and 1 (H or A) or 2 (H or A) appears in the display when the radio is first turnedon, your vehicle is equipped with this feature.If your vehicle is equipped with any other audio system and DRIVER 1 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS or DRIVER 2 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS appears in the display when the radio is first turned on, your vehicle is equipped with this feature. 3-32 With this feature, your vehcle will recall the latest radio settings as adjusted the last time your vehicle was operated. This feature allows two different drivers to store and recall their own radio settings. The settings recalled by the radio are determined by which RKE transmitter (“1” or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle. The number on the back of the RKE transmitter corresponds to driver 1 or to driver 2. The radio settings will automatically adjust to where they were last set by the identified driver. The settings can also be recalled by briefly pressing the memory seat buttons 1 or 2 located on the driver’s door. Your radio can store home and away presets. Home and away presets allow you to use one set of preset radio settings in the area where you live, and another set when you go out of town. That way, you will not need to reprogram your presets every time you travel. With the radio off and the clock displayed, use FF and RW to select home or away presets. To select the away presets, press and hold FF for five countsuntil you hear a beep. The next time the radio comes on, the away presets will be active. To select the home presets, press and hold RW for five countsuntil you hear a beep.The next time the radio comes on, the home presets will be active. Theft-Deterrent Feature Audio Steering Wheel Controls THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theftof your radio. Your vehicle has a “built-in” theft-deterrent feature on each radio that is automatic -- there is no programming required. The radioin your vehicle cannot be used in any other vehicle. When the radio was originally installed in your vehicle at the factory, it stored the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Each time the ignition is turned on, the VIN is verified. If the vehicle’s VIN does notmatch the VIN stored in the radio, the radio will THEFTLOCK. If the radio is removed from your vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be used to trace the radio back to your vehicle. Some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the following: VOLUME: Press the up arrow lever to increase volume and the down arrow lever to decrease volume. 3-33 SELECT When listening to the radio,press the up or down arrow lever to tune to thenext or previous preset radio station.(If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player, factory presets which have not been reprogrammed with your stations will be ignored). When listening to a cassette tape, the upor down arrow lever can be used to SEEK forward and rearward through the tape. Pressing the up or downarrow lever when listening to a CD will cause the player to go to the next or previous selection. When in Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) mode, the up or down arrow lever can beused to perform a PTY preset seek. PSEEK will appear on the display while the PTY preset seek is performed. The radio will seek all of the PTYs stored in presets, except for thePTY Any. Understanding Radio Reception AM The range formost AM stations is greater than for F M , especially atnight. The longer range,however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like stormsand power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce thisnoise if you ever get it. FM Stereo FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go. Tips About Your Audio System Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it istoo late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio toa safe sound level beforeyour hearing adaptsto it. 3-34 r r I To help avoid hearing lossor damage: 0 Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting. 0 Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly. NOTICE: Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle like a tape player, CBradio, mobile telephone or two-way radio be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important todo it properly. Addedsound equipment may interfere with the operationof your vehicle’s engine, radio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer andbe sure tocheck Federal rules covering mobileradio andtelephone units. -- r r L r f -- Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularlycan cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases awayfrom contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat.If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failureof the tape player. Your tape player should be cleaned regularly afterevery 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN or CLEAN TAPE to indicate thatyou have used your tape player for50 hours without resetting the tape clean display, your timer. If this message appears on the cassette tapeplayer needs tobe cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should cleanit as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction insound quality, try a known good cassette to at fault. If this other see if it is thetape or the tape player cassette has no improvement insound quality, clean the tape player. The recommended cleaningmethod for your cassette tape player isthe use of a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassettewith pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassetteturn. The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789). 3-35 When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning because cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, usethe following steps. 1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY. 2. Turn the radio off. 3. Press and hold the SOURCE button for two seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash three times. 4. Turn the radio on and insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. 5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time. When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape detection featureis active again. You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This typeof cleaning cassettewill not eject on itsown. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing typecleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning cassette is not recommended. 3-36 If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator after you clean the player. The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset. If your vehicle isequipped with any other radio, press and hold EJECT for three seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator after you clean the player. The radio will display CLEANTAPE MSG CLEARED to show the indicator was reset. Cassettes are subjectto wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced. Care of Your Compact Discs Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or otherprotective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, softcloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the holeand the outer edge. Care of Your Compact Disc Player The use of CD lens cleaner discs isnot advised, due to the risk of contaminating thelens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. I NOTICE: Don't lubricate the power antenna. Lubrication could damage it. Power Antenna Mast Care Your power antenna will look its best and work well if it's cleaned from time to time. To clean the antenna mast: 1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna. 2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or equivalent solvent. 3. Wipe the cloth over the mast sections, removing any dirt. 4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth. 5. Make the antenna go up and down by turning the radio or ignitionoff and on. 6. Repeat if necessary. NOTICE: Before entering an automatic car wash, turn off your radio tomake the power antenna go down. This will prevent the mast from possibly getting damaged. If the antenna does notgo down when you turn the radio off, it may be damaged or need to be cleaned. In either case, lowerthe antenna by hand by carefully pressingthe antenna down. If the mast portion of your antenna isdamaged, you can easily replace it. Seeyour dealer fora replacement kit and follow the instructionsin the kit. 3-37 b% 3-38 NOTES @ II NOTES 3-39 $20 NOTES 3-40 b NOTES 3-41 NOTES 3-42 I_ Section 4 Your Driving and the Road Here you’ll find information about drivingon different kindsof roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving. 4- 2 4- 3 4- 6 4- 6 4- 10 4- 13 4- 13 4- 15 4- 16 Defensive Driving Drunken Driving Control of a Vehicle Braking Steering Off-Road Recovery Passing Loss of Control Driving at Night 4- 18 4- 20 4- 21 4- 22 3- 23 4- 24 4- 25 4- 30 4- 32 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads City Driving Freeway Driving Before Leaving on a Long Trip Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Winter Driving Loading Your Vehicle Towing a Trailer 4-1 Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about drivingis: Drive defensively. Please start with a very important safety device In your Cadillac: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.) Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other drivers aregoing to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Beready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet theyaare common. Allow enough following distance.It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. 4-2 Death and injury associated with drinkingand driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. The obvious way to solve thishighway safety problem is for peoplenever to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “toomuch” if the driver plans to drive?It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it dependson each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem. Alcohol affects four thingsthat anyone needs to drive a vehicle: The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things: Drunken Driving Judgment The amount of alcohol consumed Muscular Coordination The drinker’s body weight Vision The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking Attentiveness. Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. Inmost cases, these deathsare the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. Many adults -- by some estimates, nearlyhalf the adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s against the lawin every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws. The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol. According to the American Medical Association, a 180-lb. (82 kg)person who drinks three 12-ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. Theperson would reach the same BAC by drinking three4-ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces (45 ml) of a liquor likewhiskey, gin or vodka. 4-3 Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks. The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0. I O percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is0.04 percent. The BAC will be over 0. IO percent afterthree to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them. It’s the amount of alcohol that counts.For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) withinan hour, the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lowerBAC level. There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relativepercentage of body water than men. 4-4 But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for driverswho have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink.No amount of coffee or numberof cold showers will speed that up. ‘‘I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts intothe street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. There’s something else about drinkingand driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse. especially injuries to the brain, spinal cordor heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking -- driver or passenger-- is in a crash, that person‘s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. A CAUTION: Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking. Please don’t drink anddrive or ridewith a driver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. -- -- 4-5 Control of a Vehicle Braking You have three systems that make your vehicle go where Braking action involvesperception time and reaction time. you want it togo. They are the brakes, the steeringand the accelerator. All three systems haveto do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road. ......... ....... . .. .. .. .. , P -4 L First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That’s perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time. Average reaction time is about 314 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as longas two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugsand frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, avehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That couldbe a lotof distance in an emergency, so keeping enough spacebetween your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the conditionof your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. Sometimes, aswhen you’re driving on snow or ice,it’s easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. 4-6 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking -- rather than keepingpace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the you will traffic and allow realistic following distances, eliminate a lotof unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake, Once the powerassist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid. When you start your engine and begin to drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves a little. Thisis normal. If there’s a problem with the anti-lock brake system, this warning light will stay on. See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” in the Index. 4-7 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure fdster than any driver could. Thecomputer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. ." ii Here's how anti-lock works. Let's say the road is wet. You're driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes. Here's what happens with ABS. A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels. 4-8 You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance.If you get too closeto the vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” in the Index.) Using Anti-Lock Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal. Traction Control System Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel spin. This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. The system operates onlyif it senses that one or both of the front wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system works the front brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin. The TRACTION ENGAGEDmessage will display on the Driver Information Centerwhen the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. See ‘.Driver Infomation Center Messages” in the Index. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. TRACTION CONTROL This warning light will come on to let you know if there’s a problem with your traction control system. See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the Index. When this warning light is on. the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to. (You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever getsstuck in sand, mud, ice orsnow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle” in the Index.) 4-9 To turn the system off, press the TRAC OFF button located inside of the glove box. Braking in Emergencies With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking. Steering Power Steenng If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. The TRACTION OFF message will display on the Driver Information Center. If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button, the TRACTION OFF message will display -- but the system won’t turn off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again. The TRACTION READY message should display briefly on the Driver Information Center. 4-10 Magnasteer TFr‘ This system continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle speeds. Itprovides ease when parking yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds. Steering Tips Driving on Curves It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves. Here’s why: Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and theroad surface, the angle at which the curveis banked, and your speed. While you’re ina curve, speed is theone factor you can control. Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do their work wherethe tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to “Traction Control System” in the Index. What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehiclethe way you want it to go, and slow down. If you have Stabilitrak, you may see the STABILITY ENGAGED message on the Driver Information Center. See “Stability Engaged Message” in the Index. Speed limit signs near curveswarn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower. If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. 4-11 Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over ahill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or acar suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t: there isn’t room. That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around the problem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in Emergencies’?earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available. An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly. 4-12 Off-Road Recovery Passing You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again.A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, ora brief surrender to frustration or angercan suddenly put thepassing driver face to facewith the worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision. So here are sometips for passing: edge of paved surface If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steerso that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. “Drive ahead.” Look down the road. to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time. Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken center line usually indicates it’s all rightto pass (.providing the road aheadis clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic. 4-13 Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance. When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a “running start” that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity. If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot. 4-14 Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into theright lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away fromyou than it really is.) Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down o r starting to turn. If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to theright. Loss of Control Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three controlsystems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’thave enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid mostskids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving“ those conditions. But skidsare always possible. The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the brakingskid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction control system isoff, then an acceleration skidis also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle startsto slide, ease yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go.If you start steering quicklyenough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always beready for a second skid if it occurs. If you have Stabilitrak, you may see the STABILITY ENGAGED message on the Driver InformationCenter. See “Stability Engaged Message” in the Index. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance willbe longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surfacewith reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, accelerationor braking (including engine brakingby shifting to alower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice orpacked snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow down when you have any doubt. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. 4-15 Here are some tips on night driving. Driving at Night . ......., . ........, . ... .... Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reasonis that some drivers arelikely to be impaired -- by alcohol or drugs,with night vision problems, orby fatigue. 4-16 0 Drive defensively. 0 Don’t drink and drive. 0 Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. 0 Slow down; especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. 0 In remote areas, watch for animals. 0 If you’re tired, pull .off the road in a safe place and rest. Night Vision No one can seeas well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older thesedifferences increase. A 50-year-old driver may requireat least twice as much light to see the same thing atnight as a 20-year-old. What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don‘t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare fromheadlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take asecond or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from adriver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember that your headlamps light up far lessof a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t even aware of it. 4-17 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roaas can mean ariving trouble. On a wet road, you can‘t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction isn’t asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking. It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking ormissing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. 4-18 A CAUTION: I Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work as well in a quickstop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose controlof the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally. Hydroplaning Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them. Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little orno contact with the road. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standingon the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface. there could be hydroplaning. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. Driving Through Deep Standing Water City Driving NOTICE: If you drive too quicklythrough deep puddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Neverdrive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly. some Other Rainy Weather Tips 0 0 Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle.Allow yourself .more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See “Tires” in the Index.) 4-20 L One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: Freeway Driving Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city mapand plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part. “Freeway Driving.”) Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes orsuperhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. 4-21 The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow drivingbreaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left laneon a freeway as apassing lane. At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clearview of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gapat close to the prevailingspeed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blendsmoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rateif it’s slower. Stay in the right laneunless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, checkyour mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Just beforeyou leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind” spot. 4-22 Once you are moving on the freeway, make certainyou allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slowerat night. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance.If you m i s s your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stopand back up. Drive on to the next exit. The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exitspeed is usually posted. Reduce your speed according toyour speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving forany distance at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are. Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you’reready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after aday’s work -- don’t plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you can easily drivein. Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained. it's ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course. you'll find experienced and able service experts in Cadillac dealerships ail across North America. They'll be ready and willing to help if you need it. Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as "highway hypnosis"? Or is it just plain t'alling asleep at the wheel? Cali it highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever. 0 Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean insideand outside'? 0 Wiper Blcrdes: Are they in good shape? There is something aboutan easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine. and the rush of the wind against the vehicle thdt can make you sleepy. Don't let it happen to you! If it does. your vehicle can leave the roadin less t h a ~second, ~ and you could crash and be injured. 0 Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels? What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,be aware that it can happen. 0 Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean'? Then here are some tips: Here are some things you can check before a trip: a Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for long-distance driving?Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure'? 0 Wenfher-Forecusts: What's the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system? a Mups: Do you have up-to-date maps? 0 Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortabiy cool interior. Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently. a If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise. or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. 4-23 Hill and Mountain Roads If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. 0 Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and alsothe brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. 0 Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your enginedo some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gearwhen you go down a steep or long hill. I A CAUTION: Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain. 4-24 If you don’t shiftdown, your brakes could get so hot thatthey wouldn’t work well.You would or even none going then have poor braking down a hill.You could crash. Shift down to let on a steep your engine assist your brakes downhill slope. L r I r i I A CAUTION: Winter Driving Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well.You would then have poor braking or even none going down a You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you godownhill. hill. Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb thehdl better. r I Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills ormountains. Don’t swing wide orcut across the centerof the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane. As you go over the topof a hill,be alert. There couldbe something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. f I i P i I You may see highway signs on mountains that warnof special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. Here are some tips for winter driving: Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your trunk. ~ 4-25 Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or icebetween your tires and the road. you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful. Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, includea small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. 4-26 Y d L What’s the worst time for this?“Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there. Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing or loose snow -- drive with caution. Keep your traction control system on. It improves your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction control system, you’ll want to slow downand adjust your driving to the road conditions. See “Traction Control System” in the Index. Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping soonerthan you would on dry pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index. 0 Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, icepatches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. 4-27 If You're Caught in a Blizzard Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you've been stopped by the snow. Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing,make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation.You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for surethat you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to doto summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: 0 Turn on your hazard flashers. 4-28 I - . - You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. I I A CAUTION: Snow cantrap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome youand kill you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there. Open a windowjust a little on the side of the vehicle that’s awayfrom the wind. This will help keep CO out. Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine. make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signalinglater on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while. Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Butdo it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as longas you can. To help keep warm,you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. 4-29 Loading Your Vehicle [@ TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION OCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP, WT. FRT. CTR. RR. TOTAL LBS. KG MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE CAPACITY WEIGHT XXX COLD TIRE SPEED PRESSURE TIRE SIZE RTG PSL’KPa FRT. RR. SPA. IF TIRESARE HOT, ADD 4PS1!28KPa SEE OWNER‘S MANUAL FOR ADDITlONAL \INFORMATION Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label found on the driver’sdoor tells you the proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important information aboutthe number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry. This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargoand all options not installed in the factory. MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP DATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR RR THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE U S . FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. The other label is the Certification label. found on the rear edge of the drives’s door. It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, calledthe GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. Don’t carry more than 176 lbs. (80 kg) in your trunk. ~ b ~~ A CAUTION: A CAUTION: ~~ ! b Do not loadyour vehicle any heavier than the GVWR, or either themaximum front or rear GAWR. If you do,parts on your vehiclecan break, or itcan change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the lifeof your v,ehicle. f- I NOTICE: r i r f Your warranty does not coverparts or components that fail because of overloading. If you put things insideyour vehicle -- like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,they’ll keep going. Things you put inside your vehiclecan strike and injurepeople ina sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. 0 Put things in the trunkof your vehicle. In a trunk, putthem as far forward as you can. Try to spread theweight evenly. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secureit whenever you can. Electronic Level Control This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle levelas the load changes. It’s automatic -- you don’t need to adjust anything. 4-31 Towing a Trailer fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. A CAUTION: If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example,if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not workwell or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. You may also damage yourvehicle; the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in thissection. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. -- Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer’’ that appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just drivingyour vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability and 4-32 That’s the reason for this part. In it aremany time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads,generating extra heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably towind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements. If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do, here aresome important points: There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police. Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch dealer aboutsway controls. 0 0 0 Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles (1 600 kmj your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. Then, during the first 500 miles (800 k m ) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h)and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/hj) to save wear on your vehicle’s parts. Three important considerationshave to do with weight: 0 the weight of the trailer, 0 the weight of the trailer tongue 0 and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires. Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be? It should never weigh morethan 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) if you have an Eldorado or 3,760 lbs. (1 709 kg) if you have an Eldorado ETC. These are total maximum weights including the load. But even that can betoo heavy. If you tow more than 1000 lbs. (450 kg), use trailer brakes. Be sure to followthe instructions that come with the trailer or frombrake manufacturer. It depends onhow you plan to use your rig. For example, speed. altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer areall important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle. The maximum trailer weight for your vehicle can be determined from the Gross Combined Vehicle Weight (GCVW). TheGCVW = curb weight + passenger’s weight + cargo weight + trailer weight. The GCVW should never weigh more than 7,900 lbs. (3 591 kg) total loaded vehicle and trailer. 4-33 You can ask your dealer for ourtrailering information or advice, or you can write us at: Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P.O. Box 436004 Pontiac, MI 48343-6004 In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre 1908 ColonelSam Drive Oshawa, OntarioL l H 8P7 A B Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A)of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it. and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See“Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. 4-34 If you’re using a weiiht-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to getthem right simply by moving some items around in the trailer. Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires.You’ll find these numbers on the Tire-Loading Information labelat the rear edge of the driver’s door or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue. Hitches It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow: The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper. 0 Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to sealthe holes laterwhen you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt and water can, too. Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to dragon the ground. If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. Thisequipment is very important forproper vehicle loadingand good handling when you’re driving. 4-35 Trailer Brakes Because you have anti-lock brakes, don’t try to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do, both brake systems won’t work well, or at all. If you tow more than 1000 lbs. (450 kg), use trailer brakes.Be sure to follow the instructions that come with the trailer or from brake manufacturer. Be sure toread and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able toinstall, adjust and maintain them properly. Driving with a Trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting outfor the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longerand not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself. 4-36 Before you start, check the trailerhitch and platform (and attachments),safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the sametime. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure,and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working. Following Distance Stay at leasttwice as farbehind the vehicleahead as you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid sithations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. Passing You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Backing Up Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right,move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your Cadillac dealer. The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop. Making Turns I NOTICE: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to comein contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your instrument panelwill flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steepdowngrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well. On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 k m h ) or less to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating. 4-37 Parking on Hills You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured,and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. But if you everhave to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it: 1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into PARK (P). 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes.Then shift into PARK (P) firmly and apply your parking brake. 5. Release the regular brakes. When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you: Start your engine; 4-38 Shift into a gear; and a Be sure the parking brake has released. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially importantin trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil,belt, cooling system and brake adjustment. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea toreview these sections beforeyou start your trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operatingconditions. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index. NOTES 4-39 &I 4-40 NOTES @bNOTES 4-41 b 4-42 NOTES Section 5 Problems on the Koad Here you'll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road. 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-8 5- 15 Hazard Warning Flashers Other Warning Devices Jump Starting Towing Your Vehicle Engine Overheating If a Tire GoesFlat Changing Flat a Tire 5-34 Compact Spare Tire 5-35 If You're Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow 5-24 5-24 5-1 Hazard Warning Flashers Press the button in td make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. This light on the instrument panel will flash, indicating that the hazard warning flashers are on. The hazard warning flashers will work once the button is pressed in regardless of the key position. 5-2 I Jump Starting If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicleand some jumper cablesto start your vehicle. Please follow the steps below to do it safely. A CAUTION: Pull out on the collar to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on,the turn signals won't work since they are already flashing. Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: 0 They contain acid that can burn you. 0 They contain gas that can explode or ignite. 0 They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you don't follow these steps exactly, some or all of these thingscan hurt you. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles,you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. 5-3 NOTICE: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won’t work,and itcould damage your vehicle. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. I NOTICE: If the other system isn’ta 12-volt system witha negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could causea ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage theelectrical systems. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it could saveyour radio! 4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each battery. 1A ~ ~~~~~ ~ CAUTION: ~ An electric fan can start upeven when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan. 5-4 5 . Start by removing the red positive (+) terminal cover. A CAUTION: Using a match neara battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. You don’t Be sure the battery has enough water. need to add water to the Delco Freedom@ battery installed in every newGM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first.If you don’t, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get itin your eyesor on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. 5-5 6. Check that the jumper cables don't have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could also bedamaged. Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (-) will go to an unpainted metal enginepart or a body metal surface. Don't connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too. Also, don't connect negative (-) to negative (-). I A CAUTION: Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine is running. 5-6 7 . Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+> terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. 8. Don't let the other end of the positive cable touch metal. Connect it to the positive(+) terminal of the good battery. 9. Now connect the black negative (-) cable to the good battery's negative (- j terminal. Don't let the other end of the negative (-) cable touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative ( - ) cable duvsn 'Igo to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery. 10. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (46 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. 11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for awhile. ,, ./ 12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won't start after afew tries, it probably needs service. 5-7 Towing Your Vehicle 13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting.Take care that they don’t touch each otheror any other metal. 1 Try to have a GM dealer or a professional towing service tow your vehicle. See “Roadside Service” in the Index. If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog lamps, aero skirting or special tires and wheels, these instructions may not be correct. Before you do anything, turn on the hazard warning flashers. When you call, tell the towing service: That your vehicle has front-wheel drive. The make, model’and year of your vehicle. 0 Whether you can still move the shift lever. If there was an accident, what was damaged. A. Heavy Metal Engine Part B. Good Battery C. Dead Battery When the towing service arrives, letthe tow operator know that thismanual contains towing instructions and illustrations. The operator may want to see them. A CAUTION: Front Towing To help avoid injury to you or others: 0 Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed. Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds. Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured. 0 Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck. 0 Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety chains when towing it. 0 Never use J-hooks. Use only T-hooksin the front T-hook slots and only R-hooksin the rear R-hook slots. Rear Towing 5-9 A vehicle can fallfrom a car carrierif it isn’t adequately secured. This can causea collision, serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The with chains or vehicle should be tightly secured steel cables before it transported. is Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps, canvas webbing, etc.) that can becut by sharp edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use T-hooks inserted inthe front T-hook slots or R-hooks inserted inthe rear R-hook slots. Never use J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and suspension components. 5-10 When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key turned to OFF. The steering wheel should be clamped in a straight-ahead position, with a clamping device designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s steering column lock for this. The transaxle should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake released. Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drivewheels unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the drive wheels,be sure to follow the speed and distance restrictions laterin this section or your transaxle will be damaged. If these limitations must be exceeded,then the drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly. Front Towing Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 kplz), 25 miles (40 km) L‘ NOTICE: Do not tow with sling typeequipment or fascidfog lamp damage will occur. Use wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping may be required for car-carrierequipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps. Towing a vehicle over roughsurfaces could damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle toground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To help avoid damage,install a towing dollyand raise the vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained between the ground andor wheel-lift equipment. Do not attach winch cablesor J-hooks to suspension componentswhen using car-carrier equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. 5-11 r ! I Attach T-hook chains on both sides, in the slotted holes in the bottom of the frame rails,behind the front wheels. These slots are to be usedwhen loading and securing to car-carrier equipment. 5-12 Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end of each lower control arm. r L r Rear Towing Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 kph), 25 miles (40 km) NOTICE: r r Do not tow with slingtype equipment or rear bumper valance damage will occur. Use wheel-lift or car-carrier equipment. Additionalramping may berequired for car-carrier equipment. Use safety chains and wheel straps. Towing a vehicle overrough surfaces could damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift equipment. To help avoid damage,install a towing dollyand raise the vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment. Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to suspension components when using carcarrier equipment. Always use R-hooksinserted in the R-hook slots. r I 5-13 f r Attach R-hook chains to the R-hook slots in the frame rails just ahead of the rear wheels on both sides. These slots are to beused when loading and securing to car-carrier equipment. 5-14 Attach a separate safety chain around the end of each axle inboard of the spring. Engine Overheating You will find an ENGINE COOLANTHOT, IDLE ENGINE message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED, STOP ENGINE message on the Driver Information Center (DIC). You will also hear a chime. Thereis also an engine temperaturewarning light and/or gageon the instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light” or “Engine Coolant Temperature Gage” in the Index. Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode Should an overheated engine condition existand the message ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE is displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groupsof four cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a lossin power and engine performance.This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency; you may drive up to 50 miles (80 km). Towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided. -~ NOTICE: After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. The engine oilwill be severelydegraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil life indicator. See “Engine Oil, When to Change” in the Index. 5-15 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine L 5-16 A CAUTION: Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. NOTICE: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index. If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you: Climb a long hill on a hot day. Stop after high-speed driving. Idle for long periods in traffic. Tow a trailer. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for aminute or so: 2 . Dial temperature control to the highest heat setting and open the windows, as necessary. 3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving -- OVERDRIVE (0) or THIRD (3). If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just tobe safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t comeback on, you can drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle rightaway. If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine for two or three rqinutes while you’re parked, to see if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode” listed previously in this section. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away. 1. Turn off your air conditioner. 5-17 When you decide it’s safe to lift thehood, here’s what you’ll see: A CAUTION: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. \ A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap B. Electric Engine Fans 5-18 If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it coolsdown. . . ” . A CAUTION: Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.If you do, you can be burned. Don’t run the engineif there is a leak. If you run the engine, it couldlose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive thevehicle. If it isn’t, the coolant levelshould be indicated by a CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message on the Driver Information Center. If it is, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. NOTICE: Engine damageif you keep running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty. See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index. If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating,both fans should be running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service. 5-19 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at the proper level (2.5 inches (6.4 cm) below the base of the fill neck), add a 50/50mixture of clean water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL@coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. (See “Engine Coolant’‘ in the Index for more information.) I A CAUTION: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge tankpressure cap even a little they can comeout at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the cooling system, includingthe coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling systemand coolant surge tank pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap. -0 5-20 -- Adding onlyplain water to your cooling system can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol,can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire andyou or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and DEX-COOL@coolant. 1 NOTICE: In cold weather, water can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. So use the recommended coolant. I A CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts arehot enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine. I . You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, includingthe coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don't press down while turning the pressure cap.) If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 5-21 , .: .. I 2. Then keep turning the cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. 5-22 3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture, up to the base of the filler neck. a 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off. start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fans. By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches about 2.5 inches (6.4 cm) below the base of the filler neck. 5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this. Start the engine and allow it to warm up. If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message does not appear on the Driver InformationCenter, coolant is at the proper fill level. If a CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message does appear, repeat Steps 1 through 3 or see your dealer. 5-23 If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire It’s unusual for a tireto “blow out” while you’re driving. especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,”here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers. If a front tire fails, the flat tirewill create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stopwell out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout, particularlyon a curve. acts much like a skid and may require the samecorrection you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible. If a tire goes flat,the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. 5-24 I A CAUTION: Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle you or other can slipoff the jack and roll over people. You and they could be badly injured. To help Find a level place to change your tire. prevent thevehicle from moving: 1. Put the shift lever in PARK (P). 2, Set the parking brake firmly. 3. l h r n off the engine. To be even more certain thevehicle won’t move, you can put blocksat the front and rear of the tire farthestaway from the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end. ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................ ..................................................... .................. ................................................................ ........................................... ................... .......................................... ..................... ........................................... Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... ............................................ The following stepswill tell you how to use the iack and change atire. The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk. Pull the carpeting from the‘floor of the trunk. Turn the retainer (center dial)on the compact spare cover to the left to remove it. Lift and remove the cover. (See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this section for more information about the compact spare.) 5-25 I Lift up the tire to remove it from the trunk. 5-26 Turn the nut holding the jack and wheel wrench to the left and remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench. Removing the Wheel Cover r, i r r I r- r I ~~ ~~ The tools you'llbe using include the jack (A) and the wheel wrench (B). There is a center wheel cover on the aluminum wheel. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, gently pry the wheel cover off. Be careful not to scratch thealuminum wheel edge and don'ttry to remove it with your hands. 5-27 Removing the Flat Tire and Installingthe Spare Tire 4. /r\ CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle whenit is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack, you could be badlyinjured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack. I A CAUTION: 1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts. Don't remove them yet. 2. Turn the jackhandle to the right to raise the jack lift head a few inches. 5-28 Raising your vehidewith the jackimproperly positioned can damagethe vehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury andvehicle damage, besure tofit the jack lift head into the proper location beforeraising the vehicle, il R 1t11.O INCHES (279mm) 5.5 INCHES (140 mm) 3. Position the jack under the vehicle and raise the jack lift head until it fits firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire. Put the compact spare tire near you. 5-29 6. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel. I A CAUTION: 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle to the right. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground for the spare tire to fit under the vehicle. 5 . Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. 5-30 Rust or dirt on thewheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and causean accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; butbe sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. A CAUTION: Never use oilor grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident. 2. 7 . Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub. ., \ I .r 8. Lower the vehide by rotating the wheel wrench to the left. Lower the jack completely. 5-31 9. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown. NOTICE: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in theproper sequence and to the proper torque specification. Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compac’ pare tire. It won’t fit. Store thewheel cover in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced. ~ A CAUTION: Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can causethe wheel to become loose and even comeoff. This could leadto anaccident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.If you have to replace them, besure toget new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened witha torque wrench to 100 Ib-ft (140 Nom). 5-32 NOTICE: -~ Wheel covers won’tfit on your compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover onyour compact spare, you could damage the cover.or the compact spare. Storing the FlatTire and Tools 1A CAUTION: ~~ Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose all these equipment could strike someone. Store in the proper place. After you've put the compact spare tire on your vehicle, you'll need to store the flat tire in your trunk. Use the following procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk. Put the flat tire in the trunk so the side that faces out when it is on the vehicle is facing down. The full-size tire will not fit down into the well. Place it so the front is in the well and the rear is out of the well. Secure the tire with the retainer that was used to hold the compact spare in place. Store the cover as far forward as possible. Storing the Spare Tireand Tools A CAUTION: Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stopor collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the properplace. 5-33 The compact spareis for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tirewith a full-size tireas soon as you can. See the storage instructions label to replace your compact spare into your tfrmk properly.' SPARE TIRE WHEEL WRENCH 5-34 7 Compact Spare Tire Although the compact sparetire was fully inflated when your vehiclewas new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop assoon as possibleand make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distancesup to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replacedwhere you want. Of course, it'sbest to replace your sparewith a full-size tireas soon as you can. Your spare willlgst longer and be in good shape in case you need it again. r r r r P 2 r r NOTICE: When the compact spare is installed, don’ttake your vehiclethrough an automatic car wash with guide rails.The compact spare canget caught on the rails.That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybe other partsof your vehicle. Don’t use your compact spareon other vehicles. with And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel other wheels or tires. Theywon’t fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together. NOTICE: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your compact spare. If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow What you don’t want to do when your vehicle isstuck is to spin your wheels too fast. Themethod known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck,but you must use caution. A CAUTION: If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, thetransaxle or other partsof the vehicle can overheat. That could causean engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spinthe wheels as little as possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer. r r 5-35 NOTICE: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index. 5-36 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. You should turn your traction control system off. (See “Traction Control System” in the Index.) Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index. & NOTES 5-37 b% NOTES 5-3s . .. - . 5-39 4 6 NOTES 5-40 ,<+ --\, Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section beginswith service and fuel infomation, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is alsotechnical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care. 6-2 6-3 6-5 6-8 6-8 6-1 1 6- 15 6-18 6-22 6-26 6-28 6-3 1 6-32 6-38 6-3 8 6-47 6-47 6-49 Service Fuel Filling Your Tank Filling a Portable Fuel Tank Checking Things Under the Hood Engine Oil Air Cleaner Automatic Transaxle Fluid Engine Coolant Windshield Washer Fluid Brakes Battery Bulb Replacement Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Tires Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Care of Safety Belts 6-50 6-50 6-50 6-50 6-52 6-52 6-52 6-53 6-5 3 6-54 6-55 6-55 6-64 6-64 6-65 6-65 Cleaning Glass Surfaces Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and Wiper Blades Weatherstrips Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Wheels (If Equipped) Cleaning Tires Sheet Metal Damage Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting Appearance Care Materials Chart Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Electrical System Replacement Bulbs Capacities and Specifications Air Conditioning Refrigerants Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts 6-1 Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll. go to your dealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parrs and GM-trained and supported service people. We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle a11 GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Genuine If you want to do s o m of your own service work, you’ll want.to use the proper Cadiilac Service Manual. Zt tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this rnanrral can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index. Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempring to do your own service.work. see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. You should keep a record with ali parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work w u perfmm. See “Maintenance Record” in the Mainkmnc.e Schedule Booklet. A CAUTION: You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it. 0 Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task. Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and other fasteners. “English” and “metric” fasteners can be easily confused.If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. Adding Equipmentto the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outsideof your vehicle. Fuel Use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher for best performance. You may use middle grade or regularunleaded gasolines, but your vehicle may not accelerate as well. At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet specifications ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved gasoline specifications have been developed by the American Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for better vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system protection Fompared to other gasolines. Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 9 1 (at least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular).If the octane is lessthan 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine. If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re acceleratingor driving up a hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher 6-3 octane fuel toget rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem. If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control label), itis designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorilyon fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs,return to your authorized Cadillac dealer fordiagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition isthe type of fuels used,repairs may not be covered by your warranty. Some gasolinesthat are not reformulated for low emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containingMMT are used, spark plug lifemay be reduced and your emission 6-4 control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lampon your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs,return to your authorized Cadillac dealer for service. To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engineand fuel system, allowingyour emission controlsystem to function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.In addition, gasolinescontaining oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier. I NOTICE: Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that can corrode contains methanol. Don’t use it. It metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty. Fuels in Foreign Countries Filling Your Tank If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’tbe covered by your warranty. To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact amajor oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving. . .. . ‘7 You can also write us at the following address for advice. Justtell us where you’re going and give your Vehicle Identification Number (VN). General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario Ll H 8P7 1 A CAUTION: Gasoline vapor is highly flammable.It burns violently, and thatcan cause very bad injuries. Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline. 6-5 The cap is behind a hinged door on the driver's side of your vehicle. The fuel door releaseis located on console and on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. An alternate fuel door release is located insideof the trunk on the left hand side. Pull it to release the fuel door. 6-6 While refueling, hang'the cap by the tether from the hook on the filler door. To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). The caphas a spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right. r r rfI 1 A CAUTION: If you get gasolineon yourself and then something ignites it,you could be badlyburned. Gasoline can spray out on you if youopen the fuel fillercap too quickly.This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather. Openthe fuel filler cap slowlyand wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. Be carefulnot to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle”in the Index. f1 I“ I When you put the capback on, turn it tothe right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp”in the Index. NOTICE: If you need a new cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type,it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions systemmay be damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index. 6-7 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood A CAUTION: A CAUTION: Never filla portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged ifthis occurs. To help avoidinjury to you and others: Dispense gasoline only into approved containers. Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground. Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline. An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even whenthe engine isnot running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. 6-8 A CAUTION: Things that burncan get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These includeliquids like gasoline, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washerand other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop orspill things that will burn onto a hot engine. Hood Release Pull the lever inside the vehicle to open the hood. It is located on the lower left side of the instrument panel. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the secondary hood release which is located under the front edge of the grille. Lift up on the release lever as you raise the hood. 6-9 G. Transaxle DipsticWluid Fill Location H. Air Cleaner I. Windshield Washer Fluid Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly. A. Battery B. Coolant Fill Location C. Power Steering Fluid 6-10 D. Oil Fill Location E. Engine Oil Dipstick Location E Brake Master Cylinder It's a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. Underhood Lamp Turn the parking lamps on to operate the underhood lamp. The underhood lamp will come on when the hood is opened. Engine Oil iMlUM UNLEADED FUEL ONLY TRIP fl fl. @BMaBUD .......................... ............. .. ... .... .... ........ .:...; ..i .f .............. i. .i... . .:-i..: i: .......................................... ."....... *: The engine oil dipstick is located behind the radiator on the driver's side of the engine. The black handle says ENGINE OIL on it. Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don't, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. OIL LEVEL message will appear when the engine oil is approximately 1 quart (1 L) low. If the message is displayed, check the dipstick level and add oil as needed. 11 CHECK 6-11 Checking EngineOil Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. NOTICE: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper mark that showsthe proper operating range, your engine could be damaged. A The oil fill cap is located behind the radiator on the passenger’s side of the engine. Turn the cap to the left toremove it. When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explainswhat kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index. 6-12 Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you’re through. What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Oils recommended foryour vehicle can be identified by looking for the "Starburst" symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol. I If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines. . I I You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart: RECOMMENOED SAL VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS -. FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTINB, SELECT T&-LOWEST SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE. I HOT WEATHER I SAE 1OW-30 I- PREFERRED abovo QF (-18%) DO NOT USE SA€ 20W-50 OR ANY OTHERGRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED 6-13 As shown in the chart, SAE 1OW-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W-30 if it’s going to be colderthan 60°F (16°C) before your next oil change. When it’s very cold, you should use SAE 5W-30. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50. NOTICE: Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. If you are in an area where the temperature falls below -20°F (-29”C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAEOW-30 oil. Both will provide easiercold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. 6-14 Engine Oil Additives Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added. When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has an Oil Life Indicator. This feature will let you know when to change your oil and filter -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km)and 7,500 miles (12 500 km)since your last oil change. Under severe conditions,the indicator may come on before 3,000 miles ( 5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km)or 12 months (whichever occurs first)without an oil change. The system won’t dete.ct dust in theoil. So, if you drive in a dusty area,be sure to changeyour oil every 3,000 miles ( 5 000 krn) or sooner. Remember to reset theOil Life Indicatorwhen the oil has been changed. Formore information, see “Oil LifeIndicator” in the Index. How to Reset the Oil Life Indicator After the oil has been changed, display the OIL LIFE LEFT message by pressing the INFO button. Then press and hold the INFO RESET button until the display shows “100.” This resets the oil life index. The message will remain off until the next oil change is needed. The percentage of oil life remaining may be checked at any time by pressing the INFO button several times until the OIL LIFE LEFT message appears. For more information on the Oil Life feature, see “Oil Life Indicator” in the Index. recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. I f you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil. ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center forhelp. Air Cleaner What to Do with Used Oil Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer?Don‘t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containingused engine oil. (See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.) Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil from the filter before disposal.Don’t ever dispose of oiI by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Instead, The air cleaneris located next to the windshield washer fluid reservoir on the driver’s side of the engine. Be sure the engine has cooled before following thesesteps to replace the air cleaner filter: 6-15 1 - 1. Disconnect the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor from the base of the aircleaner. 2. With a screwdriver, loosen the air duct clamp, which is located at the mass airflow sensor end of the air duct. 3 . Disconnect the air duct from the mass airflow sensor. 6-16 4. Unhook both air cleaner cover latches. One latch is located near the radiator hose (not shown) and the other latch is located next to the IAT sensor. 5. Pivot the air cleaner and air duct assembly toward the front of the vehicle. Remove the cover. Follow these steps to reinstall the air cleaner assembly: 1 . Slide the air cleaner lid into the slots in the front edge of the air cleaner base. 2. Pivot the air cleaner coverand the air duct assembly downward. Make sure that both latches are secure and fully engaged. 3. Reinstall the clean air duct overthe mass airflow sensor. Make sure that the duct is secure around the entire outer edgeof the sensor. 4. Tighten the air duct clamp. 5. Reconnect the IAT sensor. 6. Take out the air cleaner filterand remove any loose debris that may be found laying in the air cleaner base. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter. See "Scheduled Maintenance Services" in the Maintenance Schedule booklet. 7. Install a new air filter element. See "Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts" in the Index. 6-17 A CAUTION: Automatic Transaxle Fluid Operating the engine withthe air cleaner off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleansthe air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’tthere, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner off. A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil ischanged. NOTICE: If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And,dirt can easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving. 6-18 When to Check and Change Change both the fluid and filter every50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: 0 In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90”F (32O Cj or higher. 0 In hilly or mountainous terrain. 0 When doing frequent trailer towing. 0 Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do notrequire change until the message CHANGE TRANS FLUID appears on the Driver Information Center. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet. How to Check In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather. Because this operationcan be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at your Cadillac dealership Service Department. While pulling a trailer. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere,or you could get afalsereading on the dipstick. NOTICE: To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at normal operating temperature,which is 180°Fto 200°F (82°C to 93°C). Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 kmj when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10"Cj. If it's colder than 50°F (lO°C), you may have to drivelonger. Checking the FluidLevel Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle. Too much can mean thatsome of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting fire. a Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving: When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C). Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. With the parlung brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). With vour foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever ihrough each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes. At high speed for quite a while. 6-19 Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: I 3. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 4. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. . I 5. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the cross-hatched area. 1. The black transaxle fluid cap is located next to the radiator hose and below the air cleanerassembly on the driver’s sideof the engine. Remove the air cleaner assembly so you can reach the transaxle fluid cap. The assembly is attached to the vehicle by two fasteners. Lift up on the air cleanerassembly to remove it. 3 L. Find the transaxle fluid cap and turn it to the left to remove. 6-20 6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way. Replace the air cleaner assembly. How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet. If the fluid level islow, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the dipstick. 1 . Pull out the dipstick. 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t ovegi’ll. - NOTICE: We recommend you use only fluid labeled is DEXRON@-111, because fluid with that label made especiallyfor your automatic transaxle. Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11 is not covered by your new vehicle warranty. How to Reset Transaxle Fluid Change Indicator: Your vehicle is equipped with a transaxle fluid change indicator. A CHANGE TRANS FLUID message will display on the Driver Information Center(DIC) when the powertrain computer determines thatthe transaxle fluid needs to be changed or at each 100,000miles (160 000 km)interval, whichever occurs first. See your Maintenance Schedule booklet for more information. When this message appears, change the transaxle fluid and reset the transaxle fluid life indicator as follows: 1. Turn the ignition on but do not start the engine. 2. Press and hold the OFF and rear defog buttons on the climate control system at the same timeuntil the TRANS FLUID RESET message appears on the DIC. 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under“How to Check.” 4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way. 6-21 Engine Coolant The cooling s stem in your vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL J engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km) whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant. The following explainsyour cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see“Engine Overheating” in the Index. A 50/50 mixture of water and DEX-COOL@ coolant will: 0 Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C). Give boiling protection up to 265 “F (1 29°C). Protect against rust and corrosion. 0 Help keep the proper engine temperature. 0 Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. 6-32 NOTICE: When adding coolant, it is important that you use onlyDEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant. If coolant other than DEX-COOLis added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) o r 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the is not use of coolant other than DEX-COOL@ covered by your new vehicle warranty. -0 What to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL” coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts.If you use this mixture. you don’t need to add anything else. A CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and DEX-COOL@coolant. NOTICE: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer check your cooling system. I NOTICE: ~~~~~ If you use the proper coolant,you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. 6-23 Checking Coolant A CAUTION: Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and you badly. scalding liquids to blow out and burn Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator arehot. -- . The surge tank is located next to the engineblock on the passenger's side of the engine. The cooling system is under a lot of pressure when it is hot. If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you will need to add coolant. -- When your engine is cold. the coolant level should be at the full cold mark, which is 2.5 inches (6.4 cm) below the base of the fill neck. Use a flashlight as necessary to see into the tank. .................................................. .............. . ... .... ... ... ... ...................................... .... ..... .... ... ......... ... ...... ....... ..... .... ................. ............ . . ..................... If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message comes on. it means you're low on engine coolant. For more information, see "Check Coolant Level" message in the Index. 6-24 Adding Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@ coolant mixture ut the surge tank, but only when the engine is cool. I A CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethyleneglycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine. When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is tight. Surge Tank Pressure Cap NOTICE: The surge tank cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolantloss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up. If the surge tank pressure cap needs to be replaced, a GM cap is recommended. Thermostat Engine coolant temperatureis controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolantsystem. The thermostat stopsthe flow of coolant throughthe radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature. If your thermostat needs to be replaced. a GM thermostat is recommended. 6-25 Power SteeringFluid The power steering fluid reservoir is located next to the coolant surge tank on the passenger’s side How To Check Power Steering Fluid When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark. What to Use c When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired. 6-26 To determine what kind of fluid to use, see “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to usethe proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals, Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructionsbefore use. if you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use afluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. Adding Washer Fluid NOTICE: 0 0 0 The windshield washer fluid reservoir located is next to the air cleaneron the driver’s side of the engine. Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. 0 When usingconcentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid. Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full whenit’s very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. Don’t use engine coolant(antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. 6-27 Brakes Brake Fluid of the brake system. If it is. you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooneror later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all. So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. I A CAUTION: Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. the There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluidis leaking out 6-28 If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine.The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough.You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system. When your brake fluid falls toa low level, your brake warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning Light” in the Index. What to Add When you do need brake fluid. use only DOT-3 brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 1 1 ’‘ (GM Part No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. NOTICE: 0 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir. I A CAUTION: With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, o r they may not even work at all. This could causea crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. 0 Using the wrong fluid can badly damage a few brake system parts. For example, just drops of‘mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly thatthey’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See “Appearance Care”in the Index. 6-29 Brake Wear Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly). I A CAUTION: The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to an accident, When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. NOTICE: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. 6-30 Some driving conditions or climatesmay cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes. Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torquewheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of the Maintenance Schedule booklet under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.” Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. Brake Adjustment Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust forwear. Replacing Brake System Parts Vehicle Storage The bralung system on a modem vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system -- for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down. Battery Every new Cadillac has a Delco Freedom@battery. You never have to add water to one of these. When it‘s time for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. I A CAUTION: Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt ifyou aren’t careful.See “Jump Starting” in the Index for tips on working around a battery without . getting hurt. Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods. Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent Feature’‘ in the Index. 6-31 Headlamps Bulb Replacement For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contactyour dealer’s service department. Halogen Bulbs I A CAUTION: r I I Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. I I I 1. To access the headlamps, turn the lock tabs in the direction of the arrows as shown on the headlamp cover. 6-32 I rl . . ' I . 2. Lift off the cover as shown. 3. Turn the headlamp housing socket to the left to unlock the socket from the lamp housing. 6-33 4. Remove the headlamp housing socket. 6-34 5 . After removing th'e wiring harness from the headlamp housing socket. replacethe bulb and socket. Reconnect it to the wiring harness and reinstall the headlamp housing socket back into the headlamp assembly. Front Turn Signal Lamps 1. The turn signal lamps are located on the outboard side of the headlamps. To access, turn the lock tabs on the headlamp cover in the direction of the arrows and then lift off the cover (see Steps 1 and 2 under "Headlamps"). r .C - . . . h 3. Remove the tuin signal lamp housing socket and replace the bulb. 2. Turn the housing socket to the right to unlock the socket from the lamp housing. 6-35 Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) 1. Lift the trim cover to remove. 2. Twist the socket to the left and remove the socket and bulb from the housing. 6-36 Reverse the steps to reassemble the stoplamp assembly. P Rear Turn Signal Lamps and Taillamps 1. Open the trunk to gain access tothe lamp housing. A -! 5 . Press the bulb housing lever and rotate the housing to the left toremove it. To remove the bulb, push and rotate it to the left. P 2. Remove the convenience net and pull the trim away to access the wing nuts. Once you have replaced the burned-out bulb, reverse the steps to reassemble the lamp assembly. 3. Remove the two wing nuts. 4. Gently remove the lamp housing. 6-37 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper windshield wiper blade length and type, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” later in this section. To replace the wiper blade assembly: 1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY and turn the wipers on. Position the wipers on the windshield in the “mid” wipe position. Then with the door open, turn the key to OFF. 2. Insert a screwdriver intothe slot as shown and press down to release the wiper blade assembly. 3. Align the wiper arm pin with the hole on the wiper blade assembly and snap it into place to install. Tires Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Cadillac Warranty booklet for details. 6-38 r r ! rI r r A CAUTION: ~~ ~~ Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. 0 Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction.You could have an air-outand a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” h the Index. 0 UnderinfJated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires.The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold. 0 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. CAUTION: (Continued) -- I r It- CAUTION: (Continued) Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been damaged, replace them. See “Inflation Tire Pressure” in this section for inflation pressure adjustment forhigher speed driving. -- Inflation -- Tire Pressure The Tire-Loading Information label,which is located on the rear edgeof the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures foryour tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle hasbeen sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). If you’ll be driving at speeds higherthan 100 mph (160 km/h) where it is legal, raise the cold inflation pressure of each tire to 35 psi (240 kPa). When you end this very high-speed driving, reducethe cold inflation pressures to those listed on the Tire-Loading Information label. 6-39 When to Check NOTICE: Don’t let anyone tell youthat underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. Ifyour tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get the following: Too much flexing Too much heat 0 Tire overloading 0 Bad wear Bad handling Bad fuel economy. If your tires have toomuch air (overinflation), you can get the following: Unusual wear Bad handling 0 Rough ride 0 Needless damagefrom road hazards. Check your tiresonce a month or more. Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at 60 psi (420 Wa). How to Check a Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tiresmay look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Be sure to put the valve caps backon the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should berotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles ( 10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more information. The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet for scheduled rotation intervals. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index. I A CAUTION: When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper orwire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust ordirt off. (See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.) Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation. 6-41 When It’s Time for New Tires ~ One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. 0 The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. 6-42 The tire has a bump, bulge or split. The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Tire-Loading Information label. The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling,speed rating, traction, ride and other things duringnormal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an ”MS” (for mud and snow). If you ever replaceyour tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and consiruction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. I A CAUTION: Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types (radial andbias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your compact spare, though. It was developed for use on your vehicle. A CAUTION: Uniform Tire Quality Grading The following informationrelates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear. traction and temperature performance. (This appliesonly to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. 6-43 Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction -- A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areA, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction. Temperature -- A, B, C The temperature gradesare A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of 6-44 heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for atire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separatelyor in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced. Wheel Replacement ~ e p l a c any e wheel that is bent. cracked, or badly ruslea or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). Seeyour dealer if any of these conditions exist. Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity. diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts. replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your Cadillac model. A CAUTION: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle canbe dangerous. It could affectthe braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which youor others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel boltsand wheel nuts forreplacement. NOTICE: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information. 6-45 Used Replacement Wheels A CAUTION: ~ ~ ~~ NOTICE: ~~ Putting aused wheel on your vehicleis dangerous. You can’t know how it’s beenused o r how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly If you have to replacea and cause an accident. wheel, usea new GM original equipmentwheel. 6-46 Tire Chains Use tire chainsonly where legal andonly when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains that are the proper size for yourtires. Install them on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions.If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues,slow down until it or spinning thewheels stops. Driving too fast with chains on will damage your vehicle. Appearance Care Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others canburst into flameif you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space. When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle. be sure to followthe manufacturer‘s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Never use these to cleanyour vehicle: Gasoline 0 Benzene Naphtha 0 Carbon Tetrachloride Acetone 0 PaintThinner 0 Turpentine 0 LacquerThinner 0 Nail PolishRemover They can all be hazardous -- some more than others -and they can all damage your vehicle, too. Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can. In many uses: these will damage your vehicle: 0 0 Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach Reducing Agents Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth. Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil Remover. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Here are some cleaning tips: Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. 0 Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set. Carefully scrape off any excess stain. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. 0 If a ring forms after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire area immediately or it will set. 6-47 Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner on Fabric 1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt. 2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines. 3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on the container label to form thick suds. 4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly. 5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section,use a sponge to remove the suds. 6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth. 7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry. Special Fabric Cleaning Problems Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows: 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water. 2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior cleaner instructions described earlier. 6-48 3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution: 1 teaspoon ( 5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. 4. Let dry. Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows: 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry completely. 3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner. Cleaning Vinyl Use warm water and a clean cloth. Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more than once. Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don‘t getthem off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product, Cleaning Leather Cleaning Wood Panels Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap Use a clean clothmoistened in warm. soapy water (use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth. or saddle soapand wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. For stubborn stains. use a leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product. Cleaning Speaker Covers 0 Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish orshoe polish on leather. Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker won't be damaged. Clean spots with just water and mild soap. 0 Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather. Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry. Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflectionsin the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. Cleaning Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleanersmay affect the surface finish. - Do not bleach or dye safety belts.If you do, it may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. 6-49 Cleaning Glass Surfaces Glass shouldbe cleaned often.GM Glass Cleaner(GM Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust filmson interior glass. Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches.Avoid placing decals onthe inside rear window, since they may have tobe scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are usedon the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger elementmay be damaged. Any temporary license shouldnot be attached acrossthe defogger grid. Cleaning the Outsideof the Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap orother material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outsideof the windshield with GM Windshield Cleaner, Bon Powder (non-scratching glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 105001.1. The windshield is cleanif beads do not form when you rinse it with water. A 6-50 m i @ Grime fromthe windshield will stick to the wiper blades and atfat their performance. Clean the bladeby wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water. Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn. Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Apply silicone greasewith a cleancloth at least every six months. During very cold, dampweather more frequent applicationmay be required. (See “Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.) Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retentionand durability. Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep itclean by washing it oftenwith lukewarm or cold water. 1 f Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Don’t use strong soaps orchemical detergents. Use liquid hand, dish or carwashing (mild detergent) soaps. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Don’t use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, orthey could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratchesand water spotting. High pressure carwashes may cause water to enter your vehicle. Cleaning Exterior LampdLenses Use lukewarm or coldwater, a soft cloth and a liquid hand, dish or carwashing (mild detergent) soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.” Finish Care Occasional waxmg or mild polishing or your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Your vehicle has a “ b a ~ e c ~ a t l c l e a r cpaint ~ a t ~ ~finish. The clearcoat givesmore depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoatlclearcoat paint finish. NOTICE: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoatlclearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice meltingdgents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage your vehicle‘s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasive cleanersthat are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Exterior painted surfaces are subjectto aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. 6-51 Cleaning Aluminumor Chrome Wheels (If Equipped) Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then beapplied. The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. You may use chrome polish on chrome wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application. Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes canalso damage the surface of these wheels. Cleaning Tires To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner. I NOTICE: When applyinga tire dressing always take care to wipeoff any oversprayor splash from all of the painted surfaces on the body or wheels vehicle. Petroleum-based productsmay damage the paint finish. Sheet Metal Damage If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement,make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore cofrosion protection. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials availablefrom your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop. I Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust)can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. Some weather and atmospheric conditionscan create a chemical fallout, Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations, and small irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface. At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Cadillac will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first. 6-53 Appearance Care Materials Chart I PART NUMBER I I DESCRIPTION Polishing Cloth- Wax Treated Tar and Road Oil Remover Chrome Cleaner and Polish White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Vinyl Cleaner Glass Cleaner Wash Wax Concentrate 994954 1050172 1050173 1050174 1050214 32 1050427 1052870 SIZE 23 in. x 25 in. 16 oz. (0.473 L) 16 oz. (0.473 L) 16 oz. (,0.473L) oz. (0.946 L) 23 oz. (0.680 L) 16 oz. (0.473 L) 1052918"" 8 02. (0.237 L) Armor All 1052925 16 oz. (0.473 L) Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner 6-54 TM Protectant I I USAGE Exterior polishing cloth Removes tar, road oil and asphalt Use on chrome. stainless steel. nickel, copper and brass Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints Cleans and lightly waxes Protects leather. wood. acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic. rubber and vinyl Cleans carpets. seats, interior trim, door panels and floor mats lh1 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) the model designation, paint information and a list of all production options and special equipment. 1 I111111111111111111111111111111II111111111111Ill1 SAMPLE4UXWM072675 111 Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. f1 ASSEMBLY ENGINE A 9 8 CODE MODEL YEAR A PLANT This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on a plate in the front comer of the instrument panel. on the driver‘s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VTN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. Engine Identification The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine. specifications and replacement parts. Electrical System Add-on Electrical Equipment I NOTICE: Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle unless you check with yourdealer first. Some electrical equipmentcan damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other componentsfrom working as they should. Service Parts IdentificationLabel You‘ll find this label on the rear wall of the trunk on the passenger’s side. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.On this label is: 0 Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index. your VIN, 6-55 Headlamp Wiring MaxiFusesmelay Center The headlamp wiring has an individual fusewhich is powered by a MaxiFuse@.An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, havethe headlamp wiring checked right away. The MaxiFusesand relays are located next to the engine compartment fuseblock on the driver's side of the engine. To access the compartment fuse block, remove the shroud,cover. If a MaxiFuseshould blow, have your vehicle servicedby your dealerimmediately. MaxiFuse is aregistered trademark of Little Fuse Incorporated. Windshield WiperFuses The windshield wiper motor is powered by a MaxiFuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc.,the wipers will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be sure to have it fixed. RELAY CENTER IDENTIFICATION Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away. W (N IDOWS) RELAY 91 Fuse Usage Fuse BODY 1 Road Sensing Suspension (RSS) Fuse (ETC Only), Convenience Fuse, BATT Fuse, Antenna Fuse, Passenger and Driver Seat Belt Comfort Solenoids, Trunk and Fuel Door Release Solenoids and Relays, Door Lock/Unlock Relays, Damper Relay (ETC Only), Parking LampRelay, Right and LeftPark Fuse, Rear Fog Lamp Relay (Export) INADVERT Inadvertent Power Relay, Interior Lamps Fuse, CigaretteLighter- 1 Fuse, Courtesy Lamp Relay BODY 2 BODY 3 Defog Relay, Pull-Down Fuse, Right and Left Heated Seat Fuse, Electronic Level Control (ELC) Fusemelay, Antenna Fuse,Heated Mirror Fuse, Heated Backlite Fuse, Electronic Level, Control Breaker Controlled Power Relay, Controlled Power Back-up Relay, Cluster Fuse, Platform Zone Module (PZM) Fuse, Radio Fuse, DAB Relay, Trunk and Fuel Door ReleaseRelay, High-Beam Relay, Comfort Fuse,AMP (Bose Only) Fuse, Rightand Left Bose Relay Usage LAMPS Headlamps Fusemelay, High/Low Beam Control Relay, Fog Lamp Fuse, DlU Fuse, Hazard Fuse, Mirror Fuse, Inadvertent PowerRelay, Right and Left High-Beam Fuse, Rightand Left Low-Beam Fuse, Stop Fuse, Fog Lamp Relay, DRL Relay IGN 1 Rear Ignition- 1 Relay, Wiper Fuse, Relay Ignition- 1 Fuse, Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (SIR) Fuse, Accessory Relay WINDOWS Delayed Accessory Bus (DAB) Relay SEATS Horn Relay, Driver and Passenger Lumbar IdOut Relays, Driverand Passenger Up/Down Relays BATT 3 Steering Column Ignition Switch BATT 2 Steering Column Ignition Switch 6-57 Fuse Usage Fuses and Circuit Breakers IGN 1” Front and Rear Ignition- 1 Relay, Oxygen Sensor 1 and 2 Fuse, Fuel Fuse, Cruise Fuse, DFU Relay, Front and Rear Fog Lamp Relay, Control Power Back-up Relay, Ignition- 1 Fuse, Fuel Pump Relay The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems. BATT 1 Starter Relay and Solenoid, ParldXev Fuse, Park Relay, PCM Fuse, AC Compressor Fuse and Relay, Fan Relays, Reverse Relay BRAKES ABS Brake Modulator COOL FNS Cooling Fan Relays 1 and 3 * Do not alter OBD I1 related fuses 6-58 orcircuit breakers. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same amperage. Pick some featureof your vehicle that you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can. There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the engine compartment fuse block and the rear compartment fuse block. Engine Compartment Fuse Block COR LPS INT LPS CIG LTRl nnnnn , HDLPS II HAZARD IGh O(ENG) , I STOP , I MIRROR II DRL WIPERS , FUSE CENTER IDENTIFICATION A X COMP PCM(BAT) PARK/REV n n n AIC COMP RELAY . ... . I , A The fuse block is located next to the air cleaner on the driver’s sideof the engine. Liftthe cover to gain access. uuu - --ECS PCM(IGN) DIS CRUISE INJ INJ nnn Fuse Usage COR LPS Cornering Lamp Switch,Right and Left Cornering Lamps INT LPS Trunk Lamp, Courtesy Lamps, Front Vanity Lamps, Glove Box Lamp, Garage Door Opener, Courtesy Lamp Relay 6-59 Fuse Usage Fuse Usage CIG LTR1 Front and Rear Cigarette Lighters (Full Console Only) STOP L HDLP LO Left Low-Beam Headlamp R HDLP LO Right Low-Beam Headlamp L HDLP HI Left High-Beam Headlamp Stoplamp Switch, Centered High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL), Turn Hazard Switch, ABS Controller, Stepper Motor Cruise Control, Right and Left Rear Stoplamps (Export) R HDLP HI Right High-Beam Headlamp MIRROR FOG Front Fog Lamp Relay, Right and Left Front FogLamps Inadvertent Power Relay, Left Outside Rearview Mirror Switch, ALDL, Memory Mirror Module Dimmer Switch, Cluster HDLPS Headlamp Relay, High/Low-Beam Control Relay, Right and Left Low/High-Beam Fuses DRL Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) Relay, Left and Right Low Beam in DHL Mode, DRL Switch HAZARD Electronic FlasherModule, Turn/Hazard Switch, Right and Left Front Turn Lamps, Right and Left Rear Turn Lamps, Right and Left Repeater Lamps (Export), Cluster IGN 0 (ENG)* Powertrain Control Module (PCM) ABS Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)/Traction Control System IGN- 1 Rear Ignition- 1Relay, Front Fog Lamp Relay, Rear Fog Lamp Relay (Export), ControlledPower Power Relay, DRL Relay 6-60 Fuse Usage Fuse Usage WIPERS Accessory Relay, Wiper Switch DIS * Electronic Ignition Control Module A/C COMP AC Compressor Relay, Cooling Fan Relays I , 2.3, Compressor Clutch CRUISE PCM (BAT)* PCM Stepper Motor Cruise Control, Power Steering Pressure Switch, Low Refrigerant Pressure Cutoff Switch, Park Relay PARWREV TCC and Exterior Travel Brake Switch, Reverse Relay, Right and Left Back-up Lamps, Electrochromic Mirror (in Header). Park Relay, Brake TransaxleShift Interlock (BTSI) Switch, BTSI, PZM INJ* Injectors 1,4. 6, 7 INJ* Injectors 2. 3. 5 , 8 FUEL PUMP* PCM, Fuel Pump Relay, Fuel Pump OXY SEN1* Oxygen Sensor Front, CAT Front Oxygen Sensor OXY SEN2* *OxygenSensor Rear. Catalytic Converter (CAT) Rear Oxygen Sensor ECS* PCM (IGN)* Transaxle Shift Solenoids,Mass Aifflow, Canister Purge, PCM, Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR), Front Ignition- 1 Relay, Torque Converter * Do not alter OBD I1 related fuses o r circuit breakers. Powertrain Control Module (PCM) 6-61 Rear Compartment Fuse Block Fuse Usage The fuse block is located on the front wall of the trunk (behind the rear seat)on the driver’s side.Loosen the four trunk trim fasteners and pull the trim away from the fuse block to gain access. RSS Road Sensing Suspension (RSS) (ETC Only) 1 RLY IGN 1 ELC SIR nIGN 0-BODY ~ COMFORT ~~~ 0HTO BACKLT 0 ANTENNA RSS ,, Fuse , HTD MIR lCONVENCl TU: : ; : OC nRADIO’PHONE n CLJSTER ~ HTD SEAT R HTD SEAT L ~ B A n I I RSS , PULL DOWN ,, RT PARK I ~ ~ I LT PPRK , RLY IGNl* Usage Cluster, Cruisein Stalk, PZM SIR SDM ELC Electronic Level Control (ELC) Relay, ELC (AC)Compressor TURN Electronic Flasher, Turn/Hazard Switch CONSOLE Rear Zone Blower, Right and Left Heated Seat Switches (Optional) 6-62 PRNDL, PZM, Cluster, Air Control Module (ACM), Upper Zone Motor, Lower Zone Motor (Optional), HVAC Solenoids, Climate Control Panel Analog ~ n ~ Shift Only),Rear 0 0 Cluster (Console ~ Relay ~ Defog Relay, ELC 0 0 IGN 0-BODY COMFORT CD Player, Remote Keyless Entry ( R E ) , Controlled Power Relay, Air Control Module (ACM), PZM AMP (Bose Only) (Optional) Right and Left Hand Bose Relay, Right and Left Front Speakers (On Door), Right and Left Rear Speakers, BoseAmplifier PZM PZM RADIOmHONE Radio Receiver, Radio Interface Module (RIM) (Bose Only), Phone. DAB Relay, Trunk Release Relay. Fuel Door Release Relay, HighLow-Beam Relay Fuse Usage Fuse Usage CLUSTER Steering Wheel Controls, Cluster BATT ACC PZM, Electrochromic Mirror, Rain Sensor (Optionalj. Accessory Relay Driver and Passenger Seat Lumbar Switch (Optionaljl. Driver and Passenger SeatBelt Comfort Solenoid, Memory Seat Module HTD BACKLT Rear Window Defog RSS CV-RTD (CV-RSS) (ETC Only) HTD MIR Right and Left Outside Heated Mirror RT PARK HTD SEAT R Passenger Heated Seat Relay (Optional) HTD SEAT'L Driver Heated Seat Relay (Optional) Headlamp Switch, Right Front Parking Lamp, Right Frontand Rear Sidemarker Lamps, Right Park Position Lamp(Export), Right Turn/Stop/TTail Lamps, Rear Fog Lamp Relay (Export), Right and Left Rear Fog Lamps (Export) PULL DOWN Trunk Pull-Down Motor LT PARK ANTENNA Power Mast Antenna RSS Road Sensing Suspension Module (ETC Only) CONVENC Trunk Release Relay. Trunk Release Solenoid, Fuel Door Release Relay. Fuel Filler Door Release Solenoid, Door Lock Relay, Left Front Door Motors, PZM, Door Unlock Relay Left Frontand Rear Sidemarker Lamps, Left Front Parking Lamp, Left Park Position Lamp (Export), Left Turn/Stopi'"ail Lamps, Right and Left License Lamps, Underhood Lamp * Do not alter OBD I1 related fusesor circuit breakers. 6-63 Replacement Bulbs Application Number Headlamps Composite Inner High Beam ....................... 9005 Outer Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006 Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2357 NA Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . 1156 Rear Turn Signal and Taillamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2057 Capacities and Specifications Engine Specifications Displacement . . . . . . . . . 279 cubic inches (4 565 cc) Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6L DOHC V8 VIN Engine Code Eldorado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Horsepower Eldorado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 (bhp) @ 5600 rpm 205 (kWj @ 5600 rprn ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 (bhp) @ 6000 rpm 224 (kWj @ 6000 rpm 6-64 Torque Eldorado . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 (lb-ft) @ 4000 rpm 407 (N-m)@ 4000 rpm ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 (lb-ft) @ 4400 rpm 400 (N-m) @ 4400 rpm Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-7-3-4-5-6-8 Thermostat Starts To Open . . 177-184°F (81-85°C) Capacities Transaxle (4T80-E) . . . . . . . . . . 15 quarts (14.2 Lj Crankcase (Engine Oil with Filter Change) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 quarts (7.1 L) Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . . 12.5 quarts ( 1 1.8 L) Fuel Tank . . . . . . . :. . . . . . . . . . . 20 gallons (75.7 L) R- 134a Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 lbs. (0.91 kg) Vehicle Dimensions Wheel Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 inches (274.3 cm) Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.2 inches (508.6 cm) Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53.6 inches ( 136.2 cm) Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75.5 inches (191.8 cmj Front Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.9 inches (154.7 cm) Rear Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.9 inches (154.7 cm) Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 N-m) Air Conditioning Refrigerants Not all air conditioning refrigerants arethe same. If the air conditioningsystem in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the properrefrigerant is used. If you’re not sure, ask your dealer. Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Air Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type A 1096C Fuel Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type GF-580 Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type PF-58 PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type CV-774C Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41 -900 Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 131-66 Windshield Wiper Blade (Pin Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 inches (56.5 ern) 6-65 6-66 ,/= --. .\ Section 7 CustomerAssistanceInformation Here you will find out how to contact Cadillac if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects. 7-2 7-4 7-5 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-1 1 Customer Satisfaction Procedure Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users Roadside Service Roadside Service for the Hearing or Speech Impaired Gold Key Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute Resolution Program 7-12 7- 12 7-13 7-13 7-13 Warranty Information Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Reporting Safety Defectsto General Motors Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada 7-1 Customer SatisfactionProcedure t .--- . I t 7-2 Cadillac dealers have the facilities, trained technicians and up-to-date information to promptly address any concerns you may have. However, if a concern has not been resolved to your complete satisfaction, takethe following steps: STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. STEP TWO -- If after contacting amember of dealership management. it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center. 24 hours a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). For help outside of the United States and Canada, call the following numbers as appropriate: In Mexico: (525) 625-3256 In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 0 In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135 (English) or 1-800-75 1-4 136 (Spanish) Inthe Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009 0 In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-01 22 0 In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763- 1315 0 In other overseas locations, call GM Overseas Distribution Corporation in Canada at: (905) 644-4 1 1 2. a In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) 7-3 For prompt assistance, please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative: 0 Your name, address, home and business telephone numbers Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.) Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage Nature of concern We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry prompt attention. However, if you wish to write Cadillac, address your inquiry to: Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P.O. Box 436004 Pontiac, MI 48343-6004 7-4 In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Refer to your Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information booklet for addresses of GM Overseas offices. When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel. That is why we suggest you follow Step Onefirst if you have a concern. Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY) Users To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC. (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Roadside Service Each technician travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs. Cadillac Roadside Service can bereached by dialing 1-800-882-1 112,24 hours a day, 365 days a year. This service is provided at no charge for any warranty-covered situation and for a nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer under warranty. Roadside Service is available only in the United States and Canada. TOLL-FREE HOTLINE l=SOO-882-1112 Cadillac Owner Privileges TM Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner Privileges at “no charge,” throughout your 1998 Cadillac Warranty Period-- 48 months/ 50,000 miles (80 000 km). TM Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is morethan an auto club ortowing service. It provides every Cadillac owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and. when appropriate, a Cadillactrained dealer technician who can provide on-site service. 7-5 Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the following situations: Towing Service Battery Jump Starting Lock Out Assistance Fuel Delivery Flat Tire Change (Covers change only) Trip Interruption -- If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidentalexpenses may be reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km)warranty period. Items covered are hotel, meals and rental car. Roadside Service Availability Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada, an advisor is available to assistyou over the phone. A dealer technician, if available, can travel to your location within a 30 mile (50 k m ) radius, of a participating Cadillac dealership.If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Reaching Roadside Service Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number: 1-800-882- 1112. An experienced Roadside Service Advisor will assist you and request the following information: 0 0 A description of the problem Name, home address, home telephone number Location of your Cadillac and number you are calling from The model year, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), mileage and date of delivery Roadside Servicefor the Hearing or Speech Impaired Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillachas installed special telecommunication devices called Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center. Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a conventional teletypewritercan communicate with Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada 1-800-833-CMCC -- daily. 24 hours. 7-7 d Gold Key Courtesy Transportation One of your Cadillac Owner Privileges is Gold Key Courtesy Transportation. It is just onemore example of Cadillac's commitment to provide the services you expect and deserve as a Cadillacowner. Our Cadillac DealerTechnician network is ready and able to assist Cadillac customers atroadside. Gold Key Courtesy Transportation helps you get where you need to be when your Cadillac is in the dealership for warranty service.* In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for information on Courtesy Transportation. 7-8 Transportation Options* Miscellaneous Service:‘: Warranty work can frequently be handled in one day, but there is often noreason for you to wait at the dealership. Cadillachelps minimize inconvenience to you by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealership can offer you one of the following options: Should the situation necessitate making your own arrangements, Gold Key Courtesy Transportation provides forreimbursement of personally arranged transportation such as cab fare, reasonablefuel expenses for a rideprovided by another individual or a rental vehicle obtained from an independent source. Shuttle Service* Your dealership can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule when your Cadillac is unavailable due to a warranty repair. Courtesy Vehicle” For repairs that require your vehicle to be unavailable to you for an extended period of time, your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesyvehicle from the dealership, or one obtainedfrom a local rental agency. *Some restrictions maJ7 apply. Please consdt your Cadillac dealer concerning specific Gold Key Courtesy Transportation benefits offered by the dealership. Plan Ahead When Possible Whenever possible, schedulingan appointment for your vehicle’s warranty service and advising your service consultant that you wish to take advantage of Gold Key Courtesy Transportation can help minimize your inconvenience by allowing your dealer to prepare arrangements to fulfill your transportation needs in advance of your visit. 7-9 It is important that your vehicle be picked up from the dealership promptly following the completion of your You are responsible for primary insurance coverage of repairs. If your vehicle is not picked up from the the vehicle provided. In many cases, your own auto dealership within a reasonable amount of time following insurance policy may provide thiscoverage under notification from the dealer, you may be responsible provisions for rental car agreements. Please consult your for any additional rental charges incurred as a result insurance carrier tobe certain of what’s covered. of this delay. While your dealership will cover the rental expense of For Canadian Vehicles a vehicle provided under the provisionsof Gold Key Courtesy Transportation, you are responsible for In Canada, for warranty repairs during the Complete charges incurred for such items as fuelused, additional Vehicle Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited insurance coverage and any taxes or feeslevied by state Warranty, interim transportation may be available under or local governmental agencies. the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer fordetails. Owner Responsibilities 7-10 GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute Resolution Program This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Canadian owners refer toyour Warranty and Owner Assistance Informationbooklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its participation in this program. Both Cadillac and your Cadillac dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. Our experiencehas shown that, if a situation arises where you feel your concern has not been adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure described earlier in this section is very successful. There may be instances where an impartial third party can assist in arriving at a solution to adisagreement regarding vehicle repairsor interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these disagreements, Cadillac voluntarily participates in BBB AUTO LINE. BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program administered by the Better Business Bureau system to settle automotive disputes. This program is available free of charge tocustomers who currently own or lease a GM vehicle. If you are not satisfied after following the Customer Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the following address: BBB AUTO LINE Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203- 1804 Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100 To file a claim,you will be asked to provide your name and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and a statementof the nature of your complaint. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and other factors. 7-11 We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt to resolve the complaint serving asan intermediary. If this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will be scheduled where eligible customers may present their case to an impartial third-party arbitrator. The arbitrator will make a decision which you may accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be resolution bound by that decision. The entire dispute procedure should ordinarily takeabout 40 days from the time you file a claim until a decision is made. Some state laws may require you to use this program before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program or in the courts. For further information,contact the BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center at1-800-458-8006. Warranty Information Your vehicle comes with a separatewarranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash orcould cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington. D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 7-12 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,you should immediately notify Transport Canada. in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Transport Canada Box 8880 Ottawa. Ontario K1G 352. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO GENERAL MOTORS In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre. 163-005 I908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa. OntarioL 1H 8P7 Ordering Service andOwner Publications in Canada Service manuals. owner's manualsand other service literature are availablefor purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles, The toll-free telephonenumber for ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539. In addition to notifyingNHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this,we certainly hope you'll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006 or write: Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P.O. Box 436004 Pontiac. MI 48343-6004 7-13 1998 CADILLAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling oui the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailingit in with your check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.) CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1998 CADILLAC SERVICE MANUALS Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00 OWNER’S INFORMATION Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models. TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE UNIT REPAIR MANUAL This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments and specifications for the 1998 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $40.00 In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and Warranty Booklet. RETAIL SELL PRICE:$15.00 SERVICE BULLETINS Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. PLEASE COMPLETE THEORDER FORM SHOWN ON THE FOLLOWING PAGE ANDMAIL TO: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. RETAIL SELL PRICE:$10.00 CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle. OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCarcCDiscover) ~ ~~ ~~~ ORDER TOLL FREE 19. 9 Orders will be mailed within10 days of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal (NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only) service. If further information is needed, write to the address sllown below or call 1-800-782-4356 1-800-782-4356.Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return information within30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied (Monday-Friday8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST) FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927 against the original order. VEHICLE MODEL PUBLICATION FORM PRICE TOTAL ITEM DESCRIPTION YEAR PRICE NUM6ER NAME EACH* Manual Service Car 8 Light Truck Transmission Unit Repair Owner's Manual In Portfolio 8I s i I 3 Porffolio Without Manual IOwner's (STATE) I aP A 5.00 c 0 0 0 MasterCard ~ I $10.00 I TOTAL MATERIAL Michigan Purchasers I add 6% sales tax , U.S. Order Processing $5.00 Canadian Postage (See Note Below) - GRAND TOTAL Discover ~~ IC (STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS) (CITY) 1-CAD-ORD98 1998 Check or Money Order payable to Helm, Inc. (USA funds only do not send cash.) VISA (CUSTOMER'S (ATTENTION) NAME) N T (ZIP CODE) DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO. CODE $40.00 1 1998 1 NOTE: Dealersand Companiesplease provide dealer or company name, and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent. Mail completed order formto: HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 For purchases outsideU.S.A. please write tothe above address for quotation. ~ r > $1 1998 0 AREA "(Prices are subjectto change without noticeand without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.) I Number: Expiration Date mo/yr: m Check hereif your billing address is different from your shipping address shown. I CUSTOMER SIGNATURE Note to Canadian Customers: All listed pricesare quoted in U S . funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payablein U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add$11.50 plus the US. order processing. @% NOTES 7-16 ... Section 8 Index ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3 AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 1-24 How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 1-22 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21.2-61 1-25 Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 6-15 Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Air Conditioning Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65 Air Control. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3. 3-4 Alarm. Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 14 6-44 Alignment and Balance. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna. Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22. 6-23 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64. 4-7 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Anti-Lockout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Anti-Theft. Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47 Appearance Care Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 Apply Brake To Shift Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 7-11 Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrest. Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49.2.X 2-3 Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Assist Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Astroroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Audio Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 ~ Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3: 3-5 Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transaxle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1t 2-21 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2-12 Automatic Pull-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Charging System Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-? No Charge Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 Replacement, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Volts High Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 2-72 Volts Low Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-5 BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 2-43 Inadvertent Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 1 BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 1 Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Brake 6-30 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 6-28 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Parlung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Transaxle Shift Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 6-30 Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BrakeVacuum Problem Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 Brakes, Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 10 Break-In, NewVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 2-42 Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 8 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 6-64 Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29.4.29. 4.35 Carbon Monoxide .................... Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 12. 3. 15. 3.24 Cassette Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 8-2 2-5 1 Cellular Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center Console Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement . . . . 6-36 1-29 Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central Door Unlocking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 4-35 Chains. Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46 Chains.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change Engine Oil Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 Change Trans Fluid Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Charging System Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Check Brake Fluid Level Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Check Coolant Level Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 2-73 Check Fuel Gage Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Check Gas Cap Message ......................... 2-73 Check Oil Level Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Washer Fluid Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 6-53 Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-43 TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 WheretoPut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 CHMSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36 Chrome Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 6-58 Circuit Breakers and Fuses ....................... Cleaner. Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Cleaning Alummum or Chrome Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 6-48 Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50 6-47 Inside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 49 6-50 Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speakercovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Special Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48 Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.48.6.49 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50 6-49 WoodPanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Climate Control Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate Control Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Clock . Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Compact Disc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 3-17. 3-26 Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cornpact Disc Player Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 17. 3.26 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Compass. Rearview Mirror with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Console Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Continuous Variable - Road Sensing Suspension . . . . . . 2-84 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 2-48 Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22, 6-23 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 SurgeTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ? . Damage. Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Damage. Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Dead Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Defects. Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 12. 7- 13 Defensive Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Defogger.RearWindow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 DIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Digital Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Dimensions, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Dolby B Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3. 3- 16. 3-25 Door Central Unlocking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 MapPocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 OpenMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Driver Door Open Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 ... ~ 8-3 Driver Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Driver Information Center Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 1 1-12 DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driver's Outside Auto-Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . 2-48 Driving City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 4-2 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 In the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 On Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 1 1 On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 On Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 On Snow and Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 4-18 WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 DRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 4-3 DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Ecc ......................................... Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20. 3.35. Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . 2.44. Electrcnic Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 3-2 6-55 6-55 2-45 3-2 4-3 I Electronic Solar Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 6-22, 6-23 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Coolant Hot-Idle Engine Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 2-65 Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Temperature Wdming Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 2-74 Hot -- A/C Off Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Misfire -- Ease Off Gas Pedal Message . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 Overheated Stop Engine Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Power Reduced Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 2-30 Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Starting Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Engineoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 What Kind of Oil to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Engine Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 EnglisNMetric Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Exhaust, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Express-Down Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 . Fabric cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48 FanButton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 6-15 Filter.Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 1 Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 FirstGear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Flashers. Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Flash-To-Pass Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 5-23 FlatTire. Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FloorMats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 2-41 FogLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5.. French Language Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Front Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9.5-1 1 Front Turn Signal Lamps . Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . 6-35 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 3 Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 Door Lock Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 2-69 Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Level Low Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 2-69 2-59 2-60 GarmentHooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Gear Positions . Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Gold Key CourtesyTransportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Gross Vehicle Weight Ratlng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Guide en Franpis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 .. GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 2-51 Handles. Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 HighLow Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Wiper Activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Headlamps Suggested Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 Hearing. Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 1-4 Heatedseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 4-35 Hitches, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Hooks. Garment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 How to Reset the Oil Life Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 15 HVAC Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Hydraulic Brake Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 I c e Possible Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CleaningtheTop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 2- 17 2-43 2-5 1 6-39 2-56 2-42 6-49 2 - 58 2-42 Jack. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26.5.27 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Keyless Entry System . Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Labels 4-30 Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Tire-Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 8-6 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 1-6 Latches. Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-27 2-42 Light Sensor. Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Lights Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21.2.61 Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64. .4.7_ Brake System W&ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Charging System Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 2-63 Parking Brake Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Belt Reminder' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7.2-61 2-66 Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction Control System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64. 4-9 Loading YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Anti-Lockout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 PowerDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Programmable Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2-80 Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 LockAJnlockConfirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 Low Refrigerant A/C Off Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 . Magnasteer mr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 1 o Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65 Maintenance. Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 MapPocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Matching Transmitters To Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 MaxiFuses/Relay Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Memory and Personalization Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 Memory Seat and Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Mirrors ConvexOutside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Driver's Outside Auto-Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Electrochromic Daymight Rearview . . . . . . . . . 2-44. 2-45 Illuminated Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 1 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 2-47 Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4.. MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ModelReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitored Systems OK Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 N e t . Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Neutral . Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 2-23 2- 17 4-17 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Odometer. Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 2-59 Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 6-11 0il.Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Life Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85 Oil Life Indicator. How to Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 2-75 Options Not Set Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 2-49 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . 5-15 5-15 Overheating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Owner Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 13. 7- 14 P a i n t Spotting. Chemical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 ParadeDimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Park Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Parking AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 2-25 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Brake Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Over Things That Bum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Passenger's Side Temperature Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Passing . . (5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 2-16 PASS-Key IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phone Not Present Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 8-7 Power 2- 18 Accessory. Retained ........................... 3-37 Antenna Mast Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DoorLocks ................................... 2-5 2-47 Remote Control Mirror ........................ Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 6-26 Steering Fluid ................................ Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Powerseat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1-3 Lumbar Controls .............................. 1-3 Memory Function .............................. Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts .................... 1- 19 5- 1 Problems on the Road ............................ Program Pass Key Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . 2-5. 2-80 Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13, 7- 14 Pull-Down Feature, Automatic .................... 2- 12 R a d i o Personalization .......................... 3-32 Radio Reception ................................ 3-34 Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................... 3-33 Radios ............................. 3.10.3.13.3.18 Rain. Driving In ................................ 4- 18 2-34 Rainsense Wipers ............................... RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 2-43 ReadingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear Compartment Fuse Block ....................... 6-62 Outside Seat Position .......................... 1-26 1-26 Seat Passengers .............................. 8-8 Storage Armrest .............................. 2-50 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.5.13 Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Rear Turn Signal Lamps/ Taillamp Bulb Replacement . . 6-37 Rearview Mirrors .......................... 2.44.2.45 Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 ......................... 1-4 Reclining Front Seatbacks 6-65 Refrigerants.Air Conditioning .................... Remote 6-6 Fuel Door Release ............................. 2-6 Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2-82 Remote Recall Memory .......................... 2-75 Remove Key Message ........................... Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 6-65 Normal Maintenance Parts ...................... 6-45 Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 Replacing Safety Belts ............................ Reporting Safety Defects .................... 7- 12. 7-13 Restraints Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 1-5 Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 2-18 Retained Accessory Power ........................ Reverse. Automatic Transaxle ..................... 2-22 Right Front Passenger Position .................... 1-20 2-81 RKE Personalization Features ..................... Roadside Service ................................ 7-5 Rocking YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Rotation.Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 1-48 Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 6-49 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 12 Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 1- 12 How to Wear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I 15, 1-46, 1-47 Incorrect Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 12, 1-26 Lap-Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 Larger Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1 1 Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 1-7, 2-61 Reminder Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Shoulder Belt Tightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- I4 Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30, 1-32 1- 19 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 12, 7- 13 Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Reclining Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Seats Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Lumbar Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-3 Memory Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1-2 Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.39. 1-4 1. 1-43 Second Gear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 2.14.2.16 Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 A/C System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 2-76 Air Bag System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake Fluid Switch Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Bulletins. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13. 7. 14 Charging System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Electrical System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 Fuel System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Idle System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 713. 7.14 Manuals. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts IdentificatiomLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13. 7.14 Ride System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Steering System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Transmission Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Vehicle Soon Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Work. Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13. 7.14 Service Stability System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 2-26 ShiftLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shift Lever Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 . 8-9 Shifting Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Into PARK (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Out of PARK (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Shoulder Belt Tightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Signaling Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Sound Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Spare Tire, Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Speaker Covers, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Specificaticns and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Stability System Engaged Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Stains, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.48. 6.49 Starting Disabled Remove Key Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 2-19 Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Magnasteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Tips ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Wheel, Tilt ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.3.33 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Storage Mode Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 SunVisors ....................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Sunglasses Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 TM 8-10 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 52 Supplemental Inflatable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Surge Tank, Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 ... Surge Tank Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Symbols, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x111 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 3-35 TapePlayerCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Telephone. Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 2-15 Valet Lockout Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft System ProbledCar May Not Restart Message . . 2-77 Theft-Deterrent Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Third Gear, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Time, Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Tire Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38 Alignment and Balance ........................ 6-44 BuyingNew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 6-46 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ChangingaFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 6-52 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compactspare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 Inspection and Rotation ........................ 6-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Loading Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 6-44 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 Uniform Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 6-42 When It's Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Top Speed Fuel Off Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Torque, Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32.6-64 TowingaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Towing YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Control System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64, 4-9 EngagedMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 2-78 OffMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ready Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 2-78 Suspended Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Driving on Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 4-36 Driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance When Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 4-38 ParkingonHills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Tongueweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Turnsignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 3-33 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trans Fluid Reset Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Transaxle Fluid Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Transmission Hot Idle Engine Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Transmitter. Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Transmitters. Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Transportation. Gold Key Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Trunk Automatic Pull-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 LockRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 OpenMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Storage System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 TrunkMounted CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 TTYUsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 2-32 Turn and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn Signal On Chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Turn Signal On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32.2-78 Turn SignalMultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 2-41 Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 2-52 8-11 Valet Lockout Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 15 Vehicle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6 Damage Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30 Speed Limited to XXX MPH (KM/Hj Message . . . . . 2-79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Storage ...................... Overspeed Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 Vehicle Speed Limit& . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Visors. Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Washer Fluid. Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50 8-12 Wheel Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 NutTorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32, 6-64 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45 Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26, 5-27 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Express-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26, 2-35 Windshield Wipers, Rainsense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 2-39 Wiper Activated Headlamps ...................... 6-56 Wiring. Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wood Panels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 WreckerTouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Wrench, Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26, 5-27 . ..... .. . ... . . .. . . ... . . ... .................. .. . . ............ . ................................... . . . . . ...... ... ......... .. . ...... .......... ........... Taillirmps and Rear ,Tufa.siigmd& 2 0 5 ~ ..;. .... ',,c,"""." ~~~~~ .................................. . . . . ... .... .. .p.,:.:.:.:.'.. .. . .. ... ..... ................. ..... .ij r r P r r 1 25665433A i
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24 Format : application/pdf Subject : Owner's Manual Description : Owner's Manual Modified : 2014:10:26 07:14:34-04:00 Creator : Creative Document Solutions, LLC. Title : Owner's Manual Size : 21607826 Author : Creative Document Solutions, LLC. Extracted : 2014:10:17 12:21:17-04:00 Sha 1 : a586209871b01c2861e9c0e697f8a0858af69feb Modify Date : 2001:10:31 14:24:58-05:00 Metadata Date : 2001:10:31 14:24:58-05:00 Create Date : 2001:10:20 05:27:31-04:00 Creator Tool : Acrobat Capture 3.0 Producer : Adobe PDF Library 4.0 Keywords : Owner's Manual Style : Searchable Image (Exact) Tags : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/1998/cadillac/eldorado Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 380EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools